]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texi
gdb/fortran: Add allocatable type qualifier
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb
L
762
763@item How GNU properties are merged.
764
765When linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
766.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated,
767which are reported in the link map as
768
769@smallexample
770Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
771@end smallexample
772
773It indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
774merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
775is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
776
777@smallexample
778Updated property 0xc0000002 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
779@end smallexample
780
781It indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
782when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
783is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
784@end itemize
785
035801ce
FS
786@cindex link map discarded
787@kindex --print-map-discarded
788@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
789@item --print-map-discarded
790@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
791Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
792in the link map. Enabled by default.
793
252b5132
RH
794@kindex -n
795@cindex read-only text
796@cindex NMAGIC
797@kindex --nmagic
798@item -n
799@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
800Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
801libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
802mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
803
804@kindex -N
805@kindex --omagic
806@cindex read/write from cmd line
807@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 808@item -N
252b5132
RH
809@itemx --omagic
810Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
811not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
812libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
813mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
814is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
815specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
816
817@kindex --no-omagic
818@cindex OMAGIC
819@item --no-omagic
820This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
821sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
822be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
823shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
824
825@kindex -o @var{output}
826@kindex --output=@var{output}
827@cindex naming the output file
828@item -o @var{output}
829@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 830Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
831option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
832script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
833
834@kindex -O @var{level}
835@cindex generating optimized output
836@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 837If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 838the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
839should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
840option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
841the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
842no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
843of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 844
387dd777
DP
845@kindex -plugin @var{name}
846@item -plugin @var{name}
847Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
848the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
849automatically added by the complier, when using link time
850optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
851wish.
852
853Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
854from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
855@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
856those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
1c82ed74 857copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 858based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 859just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 860
26278bb8
UD
861@kindex --push-state
862@cindex push state governing input file handling
863@item --push-state
864The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
865flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
866restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
867
868The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
869@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
870@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
871@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
872@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
873@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
874
875One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
876used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
877listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
878something as follows:
879
880@smallexample
881-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
882@end smallexample
883
884@kindex --pop-state
885@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 886@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
887Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
888flags governing input file handling.
889
a712da20
NC
890@kindex -q
891@kindex --emit-relocs
892@cindex retain relocations in final executable
893@item -q
894@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 895Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
896Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
897order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
898in larger executables.
899
dbab7a7b
NC
900This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
901
4f471f39
RS
902@kindex --force-dynamic
903@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
904@item --force-dynamic
905Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
906to VxWorks targets.
907
252b5132
RH
908@cindex partial link
909@cindex relocatable output
910@kindex -r
1049f94e 911@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 912@item -r
1049f94e 913@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 914Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 915turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
916linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
917magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
918@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 919@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
920If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
921linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
922constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
923
62bf86b4
HPN
924When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
925partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
926relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
927example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
928with input files in other formats at all.
929
252b5132
RH
930This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
931
932@kindex -R @var{file}
933@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
934@cindex symbol-only input
935@item -R @var{filename}
936@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
937Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
938relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
939to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
940programs. You may use this option more than once.
941
ff5dcc92 942For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 943followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 944the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
945
946@kindex -s
947@kindex --strip-all
948@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 949@item -s
252b5132
RH
950@itemx --strip-all
951Omit all symbol information from the output file.
952
953@kindex -S
954@kindex --strip-debug
955@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 956@item -S
252b5132
RH
957@itemx --strip-debug
958Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
959
a70f34c0
NC
960@kindex --strip-discarded
961@kindex --no-strip-discarded
962@item --strip-discarded
963@itemx --no-strip-discarded
964Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
965Enabled by default.
966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -t
968@kindex --trace
969@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 970@item -t
252b5132 971@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
972Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
973@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
974@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
975and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
976a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
977
978@kindex -T @var{script}
979@kindex --script=@var{script}
980@cindex script files
981@item -T @var{scriptfile}
982@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
983Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 984@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 985@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
986output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
987the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
988specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
989options accumulate.
252b5132 990
14be8564
L
991@kindex -dT @var{script}
992@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
993@cindex script files
994@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
995@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
996Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
997
998This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
999processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1000command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1001@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1002behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1003command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1004the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1005@samp{gcc}).
1006
252b5132
RH
1007@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1008@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1009@cindex undefined symbol
1010@item -u @var{symbol}
1011@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1012Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1013symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1014modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1015different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1016option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1017
0a618243
AB
1018If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1019into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1020undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1021instead.
1022
1023@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1024@cindex symbols, require defined
1025@cindex defined symbol
1026@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1027Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1028is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1029is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1030and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1031@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1032can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1033
252b5132
RH
1034@kindex -Ur
1035@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1036@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1037For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1038@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1039turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1040@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1041It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1042with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1043be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1044@samp{-r} for the others.
1045
c005eb9e
AB
1046@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1047@cindex orphan sections
1048@cindex sections, orphan
1049@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1050Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1051specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1052
1053@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1054
1055@table @code
1056@item place
1057Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1058the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1059@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1060
1061@item discard
1062All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1063@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1064
1065@item warn
1066The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1067issue a warning.
1068
1069@item error
1070The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1071@end table
1072
1073The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1074
577a0623
AM
1075@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1076@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1078@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1079missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1080specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1081multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1082input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1083in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1084
252b5132
RH
1085@kindex -v
1086@kindex -V
1087@kindex --version
1088@cindex version
1089@item -v
1090@itemx --version
1091@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1092Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1093lists the supported emulations.
1094
1095@kindex -x
1096@kindex --discard-all
1097@cindex deleting local symbols
1098@item -x
1099@itemx --discard-all
1100Delete all local symbols.
1101
1102@kindex -X
1103@kindex --discard-locals
1104@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1105@item -X
252b5132 1106@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1107Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1108system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1109or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1110
1111@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1112@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1113@cindex symbol tracing
1114@item -y @var{symbol}
1115@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1116Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1117option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1118to prepend an underscore.
1119
1120This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1121don't know where the reference is coming from.
1122
1123@kindex -Y @var{path}
1124@item -Y @var{path}
1125Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1126for Solaris compatibility.
1127
1128@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1129@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1130The recognized keywords are:
1131@table @samp
1132
e6e2dfbd
AM
1133@item bndplt
1134Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1135
1136@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1137@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1138@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1139@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1140Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1141to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1142@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1143@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1144@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1145@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1146Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1147
233a0083
L
1148@item cet-report=none
1149@itemx cet-report=warning
1150@itemx cet-report=error
1151Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1152GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1153section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1154linker not report missing properties in input files.
1155@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1156missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1157the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1158Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1159GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1160turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1161Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1162
cd6d6c15 1163@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1164@itemx nocombreloc
1165Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1166dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1167
b8871f35 1168@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1169@itemx nocommon
1170Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1171link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1172
1173@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1174Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1175layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1176using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1177
cd6d6c15 1178@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1179Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1180is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1181This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1182
e6e2dfbd
AM
1183@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1184@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1185Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1186if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1187by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1188@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1189may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1190selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1191these options.
1192
6aa29e7b
JJ
1193@item execstack
1194Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1195
b039ef04
L
1196@item global
1197This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1198the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1199of subsequently loaded libraries.
1200
93ab9c0d
NC
1201@item globalaudit
1202This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1203This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1204setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1205tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1206the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1207all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1208
e6e2dfbd
AM
1209@item ibtplt
1210Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1211Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1212
8df93cb5 1213@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1214Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1215to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1216Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1217
cd6d6c15
NC
1218@item initfirst
1219This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1220It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1221before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1222the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1223the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1224objects.
1225
1226@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1227Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1228so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1229libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1230
5fa222e4
AM
1231@item lazy
1232When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1233dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1234the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1235Lazy binding is the default.
1236
cd6d6c15 1237@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1238Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1239
e6e2dfbd
AM
1240@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1241Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1242
e6e2dfbd
AM
1243@item muldefs
1244Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1245
cd6d6c15 1246@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1247Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1248defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1249
1250@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1251Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1252should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1253
1254@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1255Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1256
1257@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1258Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1259
1260@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1261Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1262
6aa29e7b
JJ
1263@item noexecstack
1264Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1265
e6e2dfbd
AM
1266@item noextern-protected-data
1267Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1268library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1269used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1270generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1271module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1272i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1273
e6e2dfbd
AM
1274@item noreloc-overflow
1275Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1276relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1277overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1278
cd6d6c15
NC
1279@item now
1280When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1281dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1282when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1283function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1284called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1285
1286@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1287Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1288
6aa29e7b 1289@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1290@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1291Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1292specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1293relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1294than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1295Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1296
47acac12
L
1297@item separate-code
1298@itemx noseparate-code
1299Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1300specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1301be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1302code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1303
e6e2dfbd
AM
1304@item shstk
1305Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1306to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1307Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1308
04c3a755 1309@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1310Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1311Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1312@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1313
e6e2dfbd
AM
1314@item text
1315@itemx notext
1316@itemx textoff
1317Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1318relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1319@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1320
97a232d7
NC
1321@item undefs
1322Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1323either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1324This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1325
cd6d6c15
NC
1326@end table
1327
ece2d90e 1328Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1329
1330@kindex -(
1331@cindex groups of archives
1332@item -( @var{archives} -)
1333@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1334The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1335either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1336
1337The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1338references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1339the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1340archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1341object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1342would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1343they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1344resolved.
1345
1346Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1347it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1348more archives.
1349
69da35b5
NC
1350@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1351@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1354Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1355recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1356and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1357the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1358behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1359so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1360restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1361
4a43e768
AM
1362@kindex --as-needed
1363@kindex --no-as-needed
1364@item --as-needed
1365@itemx --no-as-needed
1366This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1367on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1368the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1369on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1370needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1371emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1372non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1373the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1374non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1375Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1376the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1377needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1378from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1379
e56f61be
L
1380@kindex --add-needed
1381@kindex --no-add-needed
1382@item --add-needed
1383@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1384These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1385their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1386options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1387and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1388
252b5132
RH
1389@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1390@item -assert @var{keyword}
1391This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1392
1393@kindex -Bdynamic
1394@kindex -dy
1395@kindex -call_shared
1396@item -Bdynamic
1397@itemx -dy
1398@itemx -call_shared
1399Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1400for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1401default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1402for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1403multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1404@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1405
a1ab1d2a
UD
1406@kindex -Bgroup
1407@item -Bgroup
1408Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1409section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1410object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1411@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1412only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1413
252b5132
RH
1414@kindex -Bstatic
1415@kindex -dn
1416@kindex -non_shared
1417@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1418@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1419@itemx -dn
1420@itemx -non_shared
1421@itemx -static
1422Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1423platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1424variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1425may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1426library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1427option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1428option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1429shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1430references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1431libraries.
252b5132
RH
1432
1433@kindex -Bsymbolic
1434@item -Bsymbolic
1435When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1436definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1437for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1438within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1439@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1440executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1441the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1442support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1443
40b36307
L
1444@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1445@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1446When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1447symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1448This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1449when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1450to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1451This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1452libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1453
55255dae
L
1454@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1455@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1457typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1458global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1459within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1460to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1461in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1462which support shared libraries.
1463
1464The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1465scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1466
40b36307
L
1467@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1468@item --dynamic-list-data
1469Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1470
1471@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1472@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1474is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1475
0b8a70d9
L
1476@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1477@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1479
252b5132
RH
1480@kindex --check-sections
1481@kindex --no-check-sections
1482@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1483@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1484Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1485been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1486perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1487suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1488allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1489restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1490Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1491force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1492option.
252b5132 1493
ddbb8a31
NC
1494@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1495@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1496@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1497@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1498This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1499by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1500command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1501output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1502input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1503specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1504follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1505behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1506
1507This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1508libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1509mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1510their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1511required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1512the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1513dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1514symbols.
1515
252b5132
RH
1516@cindex cross reference table
1517@kindex --cref
1518@item --cref
1519Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1520generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1521Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1522
1523The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1524easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1525sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1526symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1527definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1528where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1529symbol are listed.
252b5132 1530
4818e05f
AM
1531@cindex common allocation
1532@kindex --no-define-common
1533@item --no-define-common
1534This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1535The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1536@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1537
1538The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1539the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1540of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1541forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1542Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1543from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1544This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1545and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1546duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1547paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1548
7bdf4127
AB
1549@cindex group allocation in linker script
1550@cindex section groups
1551@cindex COMDAT
1552@kindex --force-group-allocation
1553@item --force-group-allocation
1554This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1555normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1556default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1557change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1558command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1559effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1560
252b5132 1561@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1562@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1563@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1564Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1565address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1566times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1567limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1568context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1569symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1570constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1571using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1572@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1573equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1574
1575@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1576@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1577@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1578@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1579@itemx --no-demangle
1580These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1581and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1582present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1583underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1584mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1585different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1586to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1587demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1588is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1589
1590@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1591@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1592@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1593@item -I@var{file}
1594@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1595Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1596generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1597linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1598doing.
1599
9b8b325a
RF
1600@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1601@item --no-dynamic-linker
1602When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1603linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1604executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1605entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1606
a70f34c0
NC
1607@kindex --embedded-relocs
1608@item --embedded-relocs
1609This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1610that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1611is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1612targets.
1613
3f0a5f17
ME
1614@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1615@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1617in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1618
7ce691ae 1619@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1620@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1621@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1622@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1623Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1624with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1625
252b5132
RH
1626@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1627@item --force-exe-suffix
1628Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1629
1630If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1631@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1632the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1633option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1634Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1635it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1636
1637@kindex --gc-sections
1638@kindex --no-gc-sections
1639@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1640@item --gc-sections
1641@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1642Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1643targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1644performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1645@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1646collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1647implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1648
d5465ba2
AM
1649@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1650examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1651symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1652command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1653referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1654libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1655referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1656the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1657relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1658@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1659
ac69cbc6 1660This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1661@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1662specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1663@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1664command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1665
c17d87de
NC
1666@kindex --print-gc-sections
1667@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1668@cindex garbage collection
1669@item --print-gc-sections
1670@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1671List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1672printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1673collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1674default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1675be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1676line.
1677
22185505 1678@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1679@cindex garbage collection
1680@item --gc-keep-exported
1681When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1682collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1683default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1684executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1685collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1686Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1687it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1688ELF format targets.
1689
30824704
RM
1690@kindex --print-output-format
1691@cindex output format
1692@item --print-output-format
1693Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1694other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1695in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1696
3604cb1f
TG
1697@kindex --print-memory-usage
1698@cindex memory usage
1699@item --print-memory-usage
1700Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1701the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1702quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1703headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1704parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1705
1706@smallexample
1707Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1708 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1709 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1710@end smallexample
1711
252b5132
RH
1712@cindex help
1713@cindex usage
1714@kindex --help
1715@item --help
1716Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1717
ea20a7da
CC
1718@kindex --target-help
1719@item --target-help
a094d01f 1720Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1721
2509a395
SL
1722@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1723@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1724Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1725@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1726
1727@cindex memory usage
1728@kindex --no-keep-memory
1729@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1730@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1731symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1732instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1733necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1734while linking a large executable.
1735
1736@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1737@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1738@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1739@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1740@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1741Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1742is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1743The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1744behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1745libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1746
97a232d7
NC
1747The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1748
aa713662
L
1749@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1750@kindex -z muldefs
1751@item --allow-multiple-definition
1752@itemx -z muldefs
1753Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1754report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1755first definition will be used.
1756
b79e8c78 1757@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1758@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1759@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1760@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1761Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1762This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1763determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1764shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1765how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1766
903249d7
NC
1767The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1768referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1769an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1770a shared library.
1771
1772The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1773libraries specified at link time are that:
1774
1775@itemize @bullet
1776@item
1777A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1778that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1779resolvable at load time.
1780@item
1781There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1782symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1783
1784The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1785select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1786architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1787appropriate memset function.
1788@end itemize
b79e8c78 1789
31941635
L
1790@kindex --no-undefined-version
1791@item --no-undefined-version
1792Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1793it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1794will be issued instead.
1795
3e3b46e5
PB
1796@kindex --default-symver
1797@item --default-symver
1798Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1799exported symbols.
1800
1801@kindex --default-imported-symver
1802@item --default-imported-symver
1803Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1804imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1805
252b5132
RH
1806@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1807@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1808Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1809files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1810been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1811This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1812errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1813have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1814inappropriate.
1815
fe7929ce
AM
1816@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1817@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1819library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1820
252b5132
RH
1821@kindex --no-whole-archive
1822@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1823Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1824archive files.
1825
1826@cindex output file after errors
1827@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1828@item --noinhibit-exec
1829Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1830Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1831errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1832when it issues any error whatsoever.
1833
0a9c1c8e
CD
1834@kindex -nostdlib
1835@item -nostdlib
1836Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1837command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1838(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1839
252b5132 1840@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1841@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1842@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1843@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1844file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1845@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1846object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1847object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1848should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1849usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1850name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1851list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1852command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1853this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1854@end ifclear
1855
76359541
TP
1856@kindex --out-implib
1857@item --out-implib @var{file}
1858Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1859the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1860library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1861may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1862behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1863step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1864the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1865
36af4a4e
JJ
1866@kindex -pie
1867@kindex --pic-executable
1868@item -pie
1869@itemx --pic-executable
1870@cindex position independent executables
1871Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1872ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1873libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1874address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1875normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1876defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1877
252b5132
RH
1878@kindex -qmagic
1879@item -qmagic
1880This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1881
1882@kindex -Qy
1883@item -Qy
1884This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1885
1886@kindex --relax
1887@cindex synthesizing linker
1888@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1889@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1890@item --relax
28d5f677 1891@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1892An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1893@ifset GENERIC
1894This option is only supported on a few targets.
1895@end ifset
1896@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1897@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1898@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1899@ifset XTENSA
1900@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1901@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1902@ifset M68HC11
1903@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1904@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1905@ifset NIOSII
1906@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1907@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1908@ifset POWERPC
1909@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1910@end ifset
252b5132 1911
a094d01f 1912On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1913global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1914addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1915synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1916instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1917
1918On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1919debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1920@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1921This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1922family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1923@end ifset
1924
1925@ifset GENERIC
1926On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1927but ignored.
1928@end ifset
1929
28d5f677
NC
1930On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1931@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1932
252b5132
RH
1933@cindex retaining specified symbols
1934@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1935@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1936@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1937@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1938Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1939discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1940symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1941@ifset GENERIC
1942(such as VxWorks)
1943@end ifset
1944where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1945run-time memory.
1946
1947@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1948or symbols needed for relocations.
1949
1950You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1951line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1952
1953@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1954@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1955@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1956@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1957Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1958linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1959arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1960them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1961also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1962objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1963@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1964ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1965@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1966
ff5dcc92 1967The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1968SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1969@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1973file systems.
252b5132 1974
ff5dcc92 1975For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1976followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1977the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1978@end ifset
1979
1980@ifset GENERIC
1981@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1982@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1984When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986of the input files.
1987
1988When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1991explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1992specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1993@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1994either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995appearing multiple times.
1996
e680a6b6
NC
1997The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005supported.
2006
28c309a2
NC
2007This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010runtime linker would do.
2011
252b5132 2012The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2013libraries:
252b5132
RH
2014@enumerate
2015@item
ff5dcc92 2016Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2017@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2018Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2022at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2025@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2026On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2029@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2030On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2032@item
a1b8d843 2033For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2034variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2035@item
ec4eb78a
L
2036For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040@item
252b5132
RH
2041The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042@item
2043For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045@end enumerate
2046
2047If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048warning and continue with the link.
2049@end ifset
2050
2051@kindex -shared
2052@kindex -Bshareable
2053@item -shared
2054@itemx -Bshareable
2055@cindex shared libraries
2056Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2058shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2059undefined symbols in the link.
2060
252b5132 2061@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2062@item --sort-common
2063@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2065This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2071
2509a395
SL
2072@kindex --sort-section=name
2073@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2074This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075patterns in the linker script.
2076
2509a395
SL
2077@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2079This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080patterns in the linker script.
2081
a70f34c0
NC
2082@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
252b5132 2088@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2089@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2090Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2091each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2095@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2096Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2097output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2098This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2099certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2105many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --stats
2108@item --stats
2109Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2509a395 2112@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2113@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
a70f34c0
NC
2118@kindex --task-link
2119@item --task-link
2120This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
252b5132
RH
2123@kindex --traditional-format
2124@cindex traditional format
2125@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2126For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2128use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2131For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2132symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2135trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2136combine duplicate entries.
2137
2509a395
SL
2138@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2140Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143line.
2144@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2509a395
SL
2150@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2153@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2154@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2158@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2159
2509a395
SL
2160@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2162@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2163When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2165
9d5777a3
RM
2166@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
0d705e9f
AM
2173@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
560e09e9
NC
2179@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184@table @samp
2185@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2186Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2187
2188@item report-all
da8bce14 2189Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2190
2191@item ignore-in-object-files
2192Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200command line.
2201@end table
2202
2203The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208can change this to a warning.
2209
1715a13c
L
2210@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2212@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2213@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2214Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2215supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2216the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2218
2219@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2221@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2222Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2224about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2225is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2230
7ce691ae 2231@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2232@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234@item --warn-common
2235Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2236a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2237but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2239Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2240warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244@table @samp
2245@item int i = 1;
2246A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247file.
2248
2249@item extern int i;
2250An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252variable somewhere.
2253
2254@item int i;
2255A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260a definition of the same variable.
2261@end table
2262
2263The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267a common symbol.
2268
2269@enumerate
2270@item
2271Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272definition for the symbol.
2273@smallexample
2274@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277@end smallexample
2278
2279@item
2280Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283@smallexample
2284@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287@end smallexample
2288
2289@item
2290Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291@smallexample
2292@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295@end smallexample
2296
2297@item
2298Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299@smallexample
2300@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303@end smallexample
2304
2305@item
2306Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308encountered in a different order.
2309@smallexample
2310@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313@end smallexample
2314@end enumerate
2315
2316@kindex --warn-constructors
2317@item --warn-constructors
2318Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323@item --warn-multiple-gp
2324Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336@kindex --warn-once
2337@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339@item --warn-once
2340Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341which refers to it.
2342
2343@kindex --warn-section-align
2344@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346@item --warn-section-align
2347Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
8fdd7217
NC
2353@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2355Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2356
a0c402a5
L
2357@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358@item --warn-alternate-em
2359Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
560e09e9
NC
2361@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
252b5132
RH
2372@kindex --whole-archive
2373@cindex including an entire archive
2374@item --whole-archive
2375For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2376@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2377in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
7ec229ce 2382Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2383about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2385list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2509a395
SL
2388@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2390Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393@var{symbol}.
2394
2395This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402@smallexample
2403void *
cc2f008e 2404__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2405@{
cc2f008e 2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408@}
2409@end smallexample
2410
ff5dcc92 2411If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2412all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2417links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2418you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
4ea904ed
SH
2422Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427@smallexample
2428int
2429f (void)
2430@{
2431 return 123;
2432@}
2433
2434int
2435g (void)
2436@{
2437 return f();
2438@}
2439@end smallexample
2440
6aa29e7b 2441@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2442@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2443@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2444@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2448
e41b3a13
JJ
2449@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
6c1439be
L
2455@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457@item --enable-new-dtags
2458@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2461@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2463If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2464created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2d643429 2467@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2468@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2469Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
fdc90cb4
JJ
2475@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2481hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2483
0ce398f1
L
2484@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2492On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493compressed using zlib.
2494
2495@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2514
35835446
JR
2515@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2518linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2519for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2520about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
4f9c04f7 2522Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25231021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2524run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2525has been used.
2526
2527The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2529
c0065db7
RM
2530@kindex --build-id
2531@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532@item --build-id
2533@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2534Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2535or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2536unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2544
2545The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2551
2552Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2554@end table
2555
0285c67d
NC
2556@c man end
2557
36f63dca 2558@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2559
0285c67d
NC
2560@c man begin OPTIONS
2561
ff5dcc92 2562The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2563the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569object file).
2570
2571In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2572support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2573PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
ff5dcc92 2576@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2577
2578@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579@item --add-stdcall-alias
2580If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@kindex --base-file
2585@item --base-file @var{file}
2586Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2589[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2590
2591@kindex --dll
2592@item --dll
2593Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2594@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2595file.
bb10df36 2596[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2597
88183869
DK
2598@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600@item --enable-long-section-names
2601@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2602The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2603the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2604for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2606to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2611with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2613information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2618[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
252b5132
RH
2620@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2625do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2626only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2633to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2634feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2635@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2636mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2638
522f09cd
KT
2639@kindex --leading-underscore
2640@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641@item --leading-underscore
2642@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
252b5132
RH
2647@cindex DLLs, creating
2648@kindex --export-all-symbols
2649@item --export-all-symbols
2650If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2656@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2657@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2658exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2662@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2665extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2666(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2667These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2668@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2669@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2670@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2671@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2673
2674@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2675@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2676Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2679
2927aaca
NC
2680@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681@item --exclude-all-symbols
2682Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
252b5132
RH
2685@kindex --file-alignment
2686@item --file-alignment
2687Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689512.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@cindex heap size
2693@kindex --heap
2694@item --heap @var{reserve}
2695@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2696Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2697to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2698committed.
bb10df36 2699[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2700
2701@cindex image base
2702@kindex --image-base
2703@item --image-base @var{value}
2704Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709for dlls.
bb10df36 2710[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2711
2712@kindex --kill-at
2713@item --kill-at
2714If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2716[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2717
26d2d8a2
BF
2718@kindex --large-address-aware
2719@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2720If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2721header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2722greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2723or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
f69a2f97
NC
2727@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728@item --disable-large-address-aware
2729Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
252b5132
RH
2735@kindex --major-image-version
2736@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2737Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2739
2740@kindex --major-os-version
2741@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2742Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2744
2745@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2747Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2748[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex --minor-image-version
2751@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2752Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2754
2755@kindex --minor-os-version
2756@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2757Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2758[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2759
2760@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2762Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2763[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2764
2765@cindex DEF files, creating
2766@cindex DLLs, creating
2767@kindex --output-def
2768@item --output-def @var{file}
2769The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2775
b044cda1 2776@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2777@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2779@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2785[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2786
2787@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788@item --disable-auto-image-base
2789Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791default.
bb10df36 2792[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2793
2794@cindex DLLs, linking to
2795@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2797When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2798search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2799@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2800between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2802@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2804
2805@kindex --enable-auto-import
2806@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2807Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2808DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2818
e2a83dd0
NC
2819Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
4d8907ac
DS
2825Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826see this message:
0d888aac 2827
ece2d90e 2828"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2829documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
ece2d90e
NC
2831This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2833allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2836multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839the warning, and exit.
2840
2841There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2843
2fa9fc65
NC
2844One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2846this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2847
c0065db7
RM
2848A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2851a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853@example
2854extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2855extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857@end example
2858
2859or
2860
2861@example
2862extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2863extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865@end example
2866
c0065db7 2867For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2868is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2869
2870@example
2871extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2872extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874@end example
2875
c406afaf
NC
2876or
2877
2878@example
2879extern long long extern_ll;
2880extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882@end example
2883
2fa9fc65 2884A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2885'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2886@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2887requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2888building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2891constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893Original:
2894@example
2895--foo.h
2896extern int arr[];
2897--foo.c
2898#include "foo.h"
2899void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901@}
2902@end example
2903
2904Solution 1:
2905@example
2906--foo.h
2907extern int arr[];
2908--foo.c
2909#include "foo.h"
2910void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914@}
2915@end example
2916
2917Solution 2:
2918@example
2919--foo.h
2920/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924#else
2925#define FOO_IMPORT
2926#endif
2927extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928--foo.c
2929#include "foo.h"
2930void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932@}
2933@end example
2934
c0065db7 2935A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2936library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938functions).
b044cda1
CW
2939
2940@kindex --disable-auto-import
2941@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2942Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2943@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2944[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2945
2fa9fc65
NC
2946@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2951environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2952[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2953
2954@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2956Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2957[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2958
b044cda1
CW
2959@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2962[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2963
252b5132
RH
2964@kindex --section-alignment
2965@item --section-alignment
2966Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2968[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2969
2970@cindex stack size
2971@kindex --stack
2972@item --stack @var{reserve}
2973@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2974Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2975to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2976committed.
bb10df36 2977[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2978
2979@kindex --subsystem
2980@item --subsystem @var{which}
2981@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2985@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987@var{which}.
bb10df36 2988[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2989
2f563b51
DK
2990The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991of the PE file header:
2992[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2d5c3743
NC
2994@kindex --high-entropy-va
2995@item --high-entropy-va
2996Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997(ASLR).
2998
2f563b51
DK
2999@kindex --dynamicbase
3000@item --dynamicbase
3001The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3002randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3003Vista for i386 PE targets.
3004
3005@kindex --forceinteg
3006@item --forceinteg
3007Code integrity checks are enforced.
3008
3009@kindex --nxcompat
3010@item --nxcompat
3011The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3012This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3013
3014@kindex --no-isolation
3015@item --no-isolation
3016Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3017
3018@kindex --no-seh
3019@item --no-seh
3020The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3021this image.
3022
3023@kindex --no-bind
3024@item --no-bind
3025Do not bind this image.
3026
3027@kindex --wdmdriver
3028@item --wdmdriver
3029The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3030
2f563b51
DK
3031@kindex --tsaware
3032@item --tsaware
3033The image is Terminal Server aware.
3034
0cb112f7
CF
3035@kindex --insert-timestamp
3036@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3037@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3038Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3039as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3040other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3041will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3042same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3043can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3044that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3045identically.
252b5132
RH
3046@end table
3047
0285c67d
NC
3048@c man end
3049
ac145307
BS
3050@ifset C6X
3051@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3052
3053@c man begin OPTIONS
3054
3055The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3056libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3057all executables use an index of 0.
3058
3059@table @gcctabopt
3060
3061@kindex --dsbt-size
3062@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3063This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3064or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3065entries.
3066
3067@kindex --dsbt-index
3068@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3069This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3070to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3071executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3072@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3073
fbd9ad90
PB
3074@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3075The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3076exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3077
ac145307
BS
3078@end table
3079
3080@c man end
3081@end ifset
3082
b8891f8d
AJ
3083@ifset CSKY
3084@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3085
3086@c man begin OPTIONS
3087
3088@table @gcctabopt
3089
3090@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3091@item --branch-stub
3092This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3093sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3094usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3095can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3096the compiler or assembler.
3097
3098@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3099@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3100This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3101It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3102be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3103stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3104sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3105@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3106linker should choose suitable defaults.
3107
3108@end table
3109
3110@c man end
3111@end ifset
3112
93fd0973
SC
3113@ifset M68HC11
3114@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3115
3116@c man begin OPTIONS
3117
3118The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3119memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3120
3121@table @gcctabopt
3122
3123@kindex --no-trampoline
3124@item --no-trampoline
3125This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3126is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3127instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3128
3129@kindex --bank-window
3130@item --bank-window @var{name}
3131This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3132the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3133The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3134paging and addresses within the memory window.
3135
3136@end table
3137
3138@c man end
3139@end ifset
3140
7fb9f789
NC
3141@ifset M68K
3142@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3143
3144@c man begin OPTIONS
3145
3146The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3147when linking for 68K targets.
3148
3149@table @gcctabopt
3150
3151@kindex --got
3152@item --got=@var{type}
3153This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3154@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3155@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3156Info entry for @file{ld}.
3157
3158@end table
3159
3160@c man end
3161@end ifset
3162
833794fc
MR
3163@ifset MIPS
3164@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3165
3166@c man begin OPTIONS
3167
3168The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3169generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3170linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3171
3172@table @gcctabopt
3173
3174@kindex --insn32
3175@item --insn32
3176@kindex --no-insn32
3177@itemx --no-insn32
3178These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3179generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3180or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
318132-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3182used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3183possible.
3184
8b10b0b3
MR
3185@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3186@item --ignore-branch-isa
3187@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3188@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3190transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3191accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3192is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3193instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3194equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3195calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3196a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3197an error.
3198
833794fc
MR
3199@end table
3200
3201@c man end
3202@end ifset
3203
252b5132
RH
3204@ifset UsesEnvVars
3205@node Environment
3206@section Environment Variables
3207
0285c67d
NC
3208@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3209
560e09e9 3210You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3211@ifclear SingleFormat
3212@code{GNUTARGET},
3213@end ifclear
3214@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3215
36f63dca 3216@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3217@kindex GNUTARGET
3218@cindex default input format
3219@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3220use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3221of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3222@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3223of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3224attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3225this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3226there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3227object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3228BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3229in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3230@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3231
3232@kindex LDEMULATION
3233@cindex default emulation
3234@cindex emulation, default
3235@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3236@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3237behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3238available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3239the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3240variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3241linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3242
3243@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3244@cindex demangling, default
3245Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3246@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3247default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3248a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3249may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3250options.
3251
0285c67d
NC
3252@c man end
3253@end ifset
3254
252b5132
RH
3255@node Scripts
3256@chapter Linker Scripts
3257
3258@cindex scripts
3259@cindex linker scripts
3260@cindex command files
3261Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3262written in the linker command language.
3263
3264The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3265the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3266the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3267more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3268direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3269described below.
3270
3271The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3272yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3273linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3274to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3275such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3276
3277You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3278line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3279default linker script.
3280
3281You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3282to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3283Linker Scripts}.
3284
3285@menu
3286* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3287* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3288* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3289* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3290* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3291* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3292* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3293* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3294* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3295* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3296* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3297@end menu
3298
3299@node Basic Script Concepts
3300@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3301@cindex linker script concepts
3302We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3303describe the linker script language.
3304
3305The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3306file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3307@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3308The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3309purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3310among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3311section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3312in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3313
3314Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3315also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3316contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3317the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3318A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3319area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3320loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3321which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3322of debugging information.
3323
3324Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3325first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3326the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3327@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3328section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3329same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3330is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3331(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3332based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3333RAM address would be the VMA.
3334
3335You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3336program with the @samp{-h} option.
3337
3338Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3339@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3340has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3341information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3342will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3343static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3344referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3345
3346You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3347program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3348option.
3349
3350@node Script Format
3351@section Linker Script Format
3352@cindex linker script format
3353Linker scripts are text files.
3354
3355You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3356either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3357symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3358generally ignored.
3359
3360Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3361If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3362otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3363double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3364file name.
3365
3366You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3367@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3368to whitespace.
3369
3370@node Simple Example
3371@section Simple Linker Script Example
3372@cindex linker script example
3373@cindex example of linker script
3374Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3375
3376The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3377@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3378memory layout of the output file.
3379
3380The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3381describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3382code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3383@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3384Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3385your input files.
3386
3387For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33880x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3389linker script which will do that:
3390@smallexample
3391SECTIONS
3392@{
3393 . = 0x10000;
3394 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3395 . = 0x8000000;
3396 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3397 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3398@}
3399@end smallexample
3400
3401You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3402followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3403descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3404
252b5132
RH
3405The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3406sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3407counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3408other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3409current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3410incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3411@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3412
3413The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3414required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3415after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3416which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3417wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3418means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3419
3420Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3421@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3422@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3423
3424The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3425the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3426at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3427output section, the value of the location counter will be
3428@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3429effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3430immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3431
3432The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3433alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3434example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3435sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3436may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3437sections.
3438
3439That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3440
3441@node Simple Commands
3442@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3443@cindex linker script simple commands
3444In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3445
3446@menu
3447* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3448* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3449@ifclear SingleFormat
3450* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3451@end ifclear
3452
4a93e180 3453* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3454* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3455@end menu
3456
3457@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3458@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3459@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3460@cindex start of execution
3461@cindex first instruction
3462@cindex entry point
3463The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3464point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3465entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3466@smallexample
3467ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3468@end smallexample
3469
3470There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3471entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3472stopping when one of them succeeds:
3473@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3474@item
252b5132 3475the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3476@item
252b5132 3477the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3478@item
a094d01f 3479the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3480targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3481check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3482@item
252b5132 3483the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3484@item
252b5132
RH
3485The address @code{0}.
3486@end itemize
3487
3488@node File Commands
36f63dca 3489@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3490@cindex linker script file commands
3491Several linker script commands deal with files.
3492
3493@table @code
3494@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3495@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3496@cindex including a linker script
3497Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3498be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3499with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
350010 levels deep.
3501
4006703d
NS
3502You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3503@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3504
252b5132
RH
3505@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3506@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3507@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3508@cindex input files in linker scripts
3509@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3510@cindex linker script input object files
3511The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3512in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3513
3514For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3515a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3516then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3517
3518In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3519script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3520
e3f2db7f
AO
3521In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3522with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3523located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3524for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3525open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3526linker will search through the archive library search path.
3527The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3528as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3529path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3530@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3531
ff5dcc92 3532If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3533name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3534@samp{-l}.
3535
3536When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3537files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3538script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3539
3540@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3541@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3542@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3543@cindex grouping input files
3544The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3545files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3546new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3547in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3548
b717d30e
JJ
3549@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3550@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3551@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3552This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3553commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3554as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3555with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3556when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3557@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3558and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3559setting afterwards.
3560
252b5132
RH
3561@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3562@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3563@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3564The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3565@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3566@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3567Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3568precedence.
3569
3570You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3571output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3572
3573@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3574@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3575@cindex library search path in linker script
3576@cindex archive search path in linker script
3577@cindex search path in linker script
3578The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3579@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3580@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3581on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3582are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3583the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3584
3585@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3586@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3587@cindex first input file
3588The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3589that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3590though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3591when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3592first file.
3593@end table
3594
3595@ifclear SingleFormat
3596@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3597@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3598A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3599
3600@table @code
3601@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3602@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3603@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3604@cindex output file format in linker script
3605The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3606output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3607exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3608(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3609line option takes precedence.
3610
3611You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3612formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3613This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3614desired endianness.
3615
3616If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3617will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3618output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3619used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3620
3621For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3622command:
3623@smallexample
3624OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3625@end smallexample
3626This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3627@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3628option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3629format.
3630
3631@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3632@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3633@cindex input file format in linker script
3634The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3635files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3636This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3637(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3638is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3639command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3640@end table
3641@end ifclear
3642
4a93e180
NC
3643@node REGION_ALIAS
3644@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3645@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3646@cindex region alias
3647@cindex region names
3648
3649Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3650@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3651
3652@smallexample
3653REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3654@end smallexample
3655
3656The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3657memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3658to memory regions. An example follows.
3659
3660Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3661memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3662that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3663non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3664access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3665read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3666sections:
3667
3668@itemize @bullet
3669@item
3670@code{.text} program code;
3671@item
3672@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3673@item
3674@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3675@item
3676@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3677@end itemize
3678
3679The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3680part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3681output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3682systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3683@code{C}:
3684@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3685@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3686@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3687@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3688@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3689@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3690@end multitable
3691The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3692loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3693the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3694the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3695
3696The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3697includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3698memory layout:
3699@smallexample
3700INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3701
3702SECTIONS
3703 @{
3704 .text :
3705 @{
3706 *(.text)
3707 @} > REGION_TEXT
3708 .rodata :
3709 @{
3710 *(.rodata)
3711 rodata_end = .;
3712 @} > REGION_RODATA
3713 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3714 @{
3715 data_start = .;
3716 *(.data)
3717 @} > REGION_DATA
3718 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3719 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3720 .bss :
3721 @{
3722 *(.bss)
3723 @} > REGION_BSS
3724 @}
3725@end smallexample
3726
3727Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3728regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3729variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3730@table @code
3731@item A
3732Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3733@smallexample
3734MEMORY
3735 @{
3736 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3737 @}
3738
3739REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3740REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3741REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3742REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3743@end smallexample
3744@item B
3745Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3746into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3747@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3748@smallexample
3749MEMORY
3750 @{
3751 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3752 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3753 @}
3754
3755REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3756REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3757REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3758REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3759@end smallexample
3760@item C
3761Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3762@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3763initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3764system start into the @code{RAM}.
3765@smallexample
3766MEMORY
3767 @{
3768 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3769 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3770 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3771 @}
3772
3773REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3774REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3775REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3776REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3777@end smallexample
3778@end table
3779
3780It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3781@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3782necessary:
3783@smallexample
3784#include <string.h>
3785
3786extern char data_start [];
3787extern char data_size [];
3788extern char data_load_start [];
3789
3790void copy_data(void)
3791@{
3792 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3793 @{
3794 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3795 @}
3796@}
3797@end smallexample
3798
252b5132 3799@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3800@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3801There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3802
3803@table @code
3804@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3805@kindex ASSERT
3806@cindex assertion in linker script
3807Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3808with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3809
fd1c4238
NC
3810Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3811take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3812inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3813for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3814symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3815
3816@smallexample
3817 .stack :
3818 @{
3819 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3820 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3821 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3822 @}
3823@end smallexample
3824
3825will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3826PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3827can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3828
3829@smallexample
3830 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3831 .stack :
3832 @{
3833 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3834 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3835 @}
3836@end smallexample
3837
3838will work.
3839
252b5132
RH
3840@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3841@kindex EXTERN
3842@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3843Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3844symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3845modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3846each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3847command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3848
3849@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3850@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3851@cindex common allocation in linker script
3852This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3853to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3854output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3855
4818e05f
AM
3856@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3857@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858@cindex common allocation in linker script
3859This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3860command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3861to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3862
7bdf4127
AB
3863@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3864@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3865@cindex group allocation in linker script
3866@cindex section groups
3867@cindex COMDAT
3868This command has the same effect as the
3869@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3870@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3871and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3872specified (@samp{-r}).
3873
53d25da6
AM
3874@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3875@kindex INSERT
3876@cindex insert user script into default script
3877This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3878augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3879inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3880@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3881default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3882sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3883linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3884insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3885linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3886default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3887of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3888to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3889is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3890
3891@smallexample
3892SECTIONS
3893@{
3894 OVERLAY :
3895 @{
3896 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3897 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3898 @}
3899@}
3900INSERT AFTER .text;
3901@end smallexample
3902
252b5132
RH
3903@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3904@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3905@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3906This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3907references among certain output sections.
3908
3909In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3910using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3911will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3912errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3913a function defined in the other section.
3914
3915The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3916@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3917an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3918@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3919names.
3920
cdf96953
MF
3921@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3922@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3923@cindex cross references
3924This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3925references to one section from a list of other sections.
3926
3927The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3928output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3929a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3930there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3931must never call back.
3932
3933The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3934The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3935If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3936the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3937status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3938names, not input section names.
3939
252b5132
RH
3940@ifclear SingleFormat
3941@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3942@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3943@cindex machine architecture
3944@cindex architecture
3945Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3946of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3947architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3948the @samp{-f} option.
3949@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3950
3951@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3952@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3953This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3954@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3955in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3956@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3957@end table
3958
3959@node Assignments
3960@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3961@cindex assignment in scripts
3962@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3963@cindex variables, defining
3964You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3965the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3966
3967@menu
3968* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3969* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3970* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3971* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3972* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3973@end menu
3974
3975@node Simple Assignments
3976@subsection Simple Assignments
3977
3978You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3979
3980@table @code
3981@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3982@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3983@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3984@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3985@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3986@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3987@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3988@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3989@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3990@end table
3991
3992The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3993@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3994defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3995
3996The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3997may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3998
3999The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4000
4001Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4002
4003You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4004statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4005section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4006
4007The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4008expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4009
4010Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4011assignments may be used:
4012
4013@smallexample
4014floating_point = 0;
4015SECTIONS
4016@{
4017 .text :
4018 @{
4019 *(.text)
4020 _etext = .;
4021 @}
156e34dd 4022 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4023 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4024@}
4025@end smallexample
4026@noindent
4027In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4028zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4029the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4030defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4031upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4032
eb8476a6
MR
4033@node HIDDEN
4034@subsection HIDDEN
4035@cindex HIDDEN
4036For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4037exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4038
4039Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4040@code{HIDDEN}:
4041
4042@smallexample
4043HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4044SECTIONS
4045@{
4046 .text :
4047 @{
4048 *(.text)
4049 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4050 @}
4051 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4052 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4053@}
4054@end smallexample
4055@noindent
4056In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4057
252b5132
RH
4058@node PROVIDE
4059@subsection PROVIDE
4060@cindex PROVIDE
4061In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4062only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4063the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4064@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4065@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4066@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4067@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4068@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4069
4070Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4071@smallexample
4072SECTIONS
4073@{
4074 .text :
4075 @{
4076 *(.text)
4077 _etext = .;
4078 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4079 @}
4080@}
4081@end smallexample
4082
4083In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4084underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4085the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4086underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4087If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4088linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4089
b0daac83
NC
4090Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4091defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4092that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4093when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4094@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4095
7af8e998
L
4096@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4097@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4098@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4099Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4100hidden and won't be exported.
4101
73ae6183
NC
4102@node Source Code Reference
4103@subsection Source Code Reference
4104
4105Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4106intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4107a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4108symbol that does not have a value.
4109
4110Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4111transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4112stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4113prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4114mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4115of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4116variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4117linker script variable might be referred to as:
4118
4119@smallexample
4120 extern int foo;
4121@end smallexample
4122
4123But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4124
4125@smallexample
4126 _foo = 1000;
4127@end smallexample
4128
4129In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4130transformation has taken place.
4131
4132When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4133things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4134in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4135second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4136table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4137contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4138value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4139
4140@smallexample
4141 int foo = 1000;
4142@end smallexample
4143
10bf6894 4144creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4145holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4146number 1000 is initially stored.
4147
4148When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4149first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4150memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4151So:
4152
4153@smallexample
4154 foo = 1;
4155@end smallexample
4156
4157looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4158associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4159address. Whereas:
4160
4161@smallexample
4162 int * a = & foo;
4163@end smallexample
4164
10bf6894 4165looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4166and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4167the variable @samp{a}.
4168
4169Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4170the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4171an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4172
4173@smallexample
4174 foo = 1000;
4175@end smallexample
4176
4177creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4178the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4179address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4180linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4181access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4182
4183Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4184you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4185use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4186section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4187linker script contains these declarations:
4188
4189@smallexample
4190@group
4191 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4192 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4193 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4194@end group
4195@end smallexample
4196
4197Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4198
4199@smallexample
4200@group
4201 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4202
73ae6183
NC
4203 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4204@end group
4205@end smallexample
4206
4207Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4208Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4209arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4210
4211@smallexample
4212@group
4213 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4214
4215 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4216@end group
4217@end smallexample
4218
4219Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4220operators.
73ae6183 4221
252b5132 4222@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4223@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4224@kindex SECTIONS
4225The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4226into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4227
4228The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4229@smallexample
4230SECTIONS
4231@{
4232 @var{sections-command}
4233 @var{sections-command}
4234 @dots{}
4235@}
4236@end smallexample
4237
4238Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4239
4240@itemize @bullet
4241@item
4242an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4243@item
4244a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4245@item
4246an output section description
4247@item
4248an overlay description
4249@end itemize
4250
4251The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4252@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4253those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4254understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4255the layout of the output file.
4256
4257Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4258below.
4259
4260If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4261linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4262section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4263input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4264example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4265in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4266
4267@menu
4268* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4269* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4270* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4271* Input Section:: Input section description
4272* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4273* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4274* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4275* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4276* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4277@end menu
4278
4279@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4280@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4281The full description of an output section looks like this:
4282@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4283@group
7e7d5768 4284@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4285 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4286 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4287 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4288 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4289 @{
4290 @var{output-section-command}
4291 @var{output-section-command}
4292 @dots{}
abc9061b 4293 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4294@end group
4295@end smallexample
4296
4297Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4298
4299The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4300name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4301The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4302the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4303The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4304
4305Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4306
4307@itemize @bullet
4308@item
4309a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4310@item
4311an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4312@item
4313data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4314@item
4315a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4316@end itemize
4317
4318@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4319@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4320@cindex name, section
4321@cindex section name
4322The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4323meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4324support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4325must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4326example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4327output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4328names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4329quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4330characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4331commas must be quoted.
4332
4333The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4334Discarding}.
4335
4336@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4337@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4338@cindex address, section
4339@cindex section address
4340The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4341address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4342is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4343
4344If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4345section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4346to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4347alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4348contained within the output section.
4349
4350The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4351
4352@itemize @bullet
4353@item
4354If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4355is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4356in that region.
4357
4358@item
4359If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4360regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4361section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4362be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4363
4364@item
4365If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4366the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4367counter.
4368@end itemize
4369
4370@noindent
4371For example:
4372
252b5132
RH
4373@smallexample
4374.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4375@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4376
252b5132
RH
4377@noindent
4378and
ea5cae92 4379
252b5132
RH
4380@smallexample
4381.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4382@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4383
252b5132
RH
4384@noindent
4385are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4386@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4387counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4388counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4389input sections.
252b5132
RH
4390
4391The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4392For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4393so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4394do something like this:
4395@smallexample
4396.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4397@end smallexample
4398@noindent
4399This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4400aligned upward to the specified value.
4401
4402Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4403location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4404sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4405
4406@node Input Section
36f63dca 4407@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4408@cindex input sections
4409@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4410The most common output section command is an input section description.
4411
4412The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4413You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4414in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4415map the input files into your memory layout.
4416
4417@menu
4418* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4419* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4420* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4421* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4422* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4423@end menu
4424
4425@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4426@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4427@cindex input section basics
4428An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4429by a list of section names in parentheses.
4430
4431The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4432describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4433
4434The most common input section description is to include all input
4435sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4436include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4437@smallexample
4438*(.text)
4439@end smallexample
4440@noindent
18625d54 4441Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4442@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4443of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4444match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4445example:
252b5132 4446@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4447EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4448@end smallexample
4449@noindent
4450will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4451and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4452placed inside the section list, for example:
4453@smallexample
b4346c09 4454*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4455@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4456@noindent
4457The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4458two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4459more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4460
4461There are two ways to include more than one section:
4462@smallexample
4463*(.text .rdata)
4464*(.text) *(.rdata)
4465@end smallexample
4466@noindent
4467The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4468@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4469first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4470they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4471@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4472@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4473
8f1732fc
AB
4474When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4475is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4476immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4477@smallexample
4478*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4479@end smallexample
4480@noindent
4481will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4482@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4483from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4484exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4485could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4486@smallexample
4487*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4488@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4489@noindent
4490Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4491before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4492all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4493@smallexample
4494EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4495@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4496
252b5132
RH
4497You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4498You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4499needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4500@smallexample
4501data.o(.data)
4502@end smallexample
4503
ae17ab41
CM
4504To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4505of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4506
4507Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4508
4509@smallexample
4510@group
4511SECTIONS @{
4512 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4513 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4514@}
4515@end group
4516@end smallexample
4517
4518In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4519input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4520@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4521@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4522whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4523
967928e9
AM
4524You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4525matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4526with no whitespace around the colon.
4527
4528@table @samp
4529@item archive:file
4530matches file within archive
4531@item archive:
4532matches the whole archive
4533@item :file
4534matches file but not one in an archive
4535@end table
4536
4537Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4538wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4539single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4540@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4541within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4542also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4543other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4544from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4545command.
4546
252b5132
RH
4547If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4548the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4549commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4550@smallexample
4551data.o
4552@end smallexample
4553
967928e9
AM
4554When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4555and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4556characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4557name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4558did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4559though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4560@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4561the archive search path.
4562
4563@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4564@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4565@cindex input section wildcards
4566@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4567@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4568@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4569In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4570name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4571
4572The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4573pattern for the file name.
4574
4575The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4576
4577@table @samp
4578@item *
4579matches any number of characters
4580@item ?
4581matches any single character
4582@item [@var{chars}]
4583matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4584character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4585@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4586@item \
4587quotes the following character
4588@end table
4589
4590When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4591will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4592Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4593exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4594@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4595a @samp{/} character.
4596
4597File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4598specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4599does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4600
4601If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4602appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4603will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4604sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4605@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4606@smallexample
4607.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4608.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4609@end smallexample
4610
bcaa7b3e 4611@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4612Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4613in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4614this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4615pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4616@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4617into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4618
bcaa7b3e
L
4619@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4620@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4621difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4622descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4623Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4624reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4625
02ecc8e9
L
4626@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4627@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4628difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4629ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4630encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4631
bcaa7b3e
L
4632@cindex SORT
4633@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4634
4635When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4636can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4637
4638@enumerate
4639@item
4640@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4641It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4642sections have the same name.
4643@item
4644@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4645It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4646sections have the same alignment.
4647@item
c0065db7 4648@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4649treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4650@item
4651@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4652is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4653@item
4654All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4655@end enumerate
4656
a05a5b64 4657When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4658section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4659takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4660
4661If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4662command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4663treated as nested sorting command.
4664
4665@enumerate
4666@item
4667@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4668@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4669@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4670@item
4671@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4672@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4673@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4674@end enumerate
4675
4676If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4677command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4678
eda680f8 4679@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4680@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4681section sorting option.
4682
252b5132
RH
4683If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4684@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4685precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4686
4687This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4688files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4689sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4690The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4691with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4692linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4693@smallexample
4694@group
4695SECTIONS @{
4696 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4697 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4698 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4699 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4700@}
4701@end group
4702@end smallexample
4703
4704@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4705@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4706@cindex common symbol placement
4707@cindex uninitialized data placement
4708A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4709file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4710linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4711named @samp{COMMON}.
4712
4713You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4714other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4715particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4716input files are placed in another section.
4717
4718In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4719@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4720@smallexample
4721.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4722@end smallexample
4723
4724@cindex scommon section
4725@cindex small common symbols
4726Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4727example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4728symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4729different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4730the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4731symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4732to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4733locations.
4734
4735@cindex [COMMON]
4736You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4737notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4738@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4739
4740@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4741@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4742@cindex KEEP
4743@cindex garbage collection
4744When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4745it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4746This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4747with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4748@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4749
4750@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4751@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4752The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4753to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4754start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4755@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4756follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4757@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4758@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4759All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4760files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4761
4762@smallexample
4763@group
4764SECTIONS @{
4765 outputa 0x10000 :
4766 @{
4767 all.o
4768 foo.o (.input1)
4769 @}
36f63dca
NC
4770@end group
4771@group
252b5132
RH
4772 outputb :
4773 @{
4774 foo.o (.input2)
4775 foo1.o (.input1)
4776 @}
36f63dca
NC
4777@end group
4778@group
252b5132
RH
4779 outputc :
4780 @{
4781 *(.input1)
4782 *(.input2)
4783 @}
4784@}
4785@end group
a1ab1d2a 4786@end smallexample
252b5132 4787
cbd0eecf
L
4788If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4789and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4790automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4791__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4792indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4793respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4794C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4795
252b5132 4796@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4797@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4798@cindex data
4799@cindex section data
4800@cindex output section data
4801@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4802@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4803@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4804@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4805@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4806You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4807@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4808an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4809parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4810value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4811counter.
4812
4813The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4814store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4815bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4816stored.
4817
4818For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4819of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4820@smallexample
4821BYTE(1)
4822LONG(addr)
4823@end smallexample
4824
4825When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4826same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4827target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4828@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4829@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4830
4831If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4832which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4833When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4834true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4835endianness of the first input object file.
4836
36f63dca 4837Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4838between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4839@smallexample
4840SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4841@end smallexample
4842whereas this will work:
4843@smallexample
4844SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4845@end smallexample
4846
252b5132
RH
4847@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4848@cindex holes, filling
4849@cindex unspecified memory
4850You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4851current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4852otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4853gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4854with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4855necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4856point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4857than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4858different parts of an output section.
4859
4860This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4861value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4862@smallexample
563e308f 4863FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4864@end smallexample
4865
4866The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4867section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4868part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4869entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4870precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4871expression.
252b5132
RH
4872
4873@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4874@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4875There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4876commands.
4877
4878@table @code
4879@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4880@cindex input filename symbols
4881@cindex filename symbols
4882@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4883The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4884The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4885file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4886the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4887
4888This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4889normally used for any other object file format.
4890
4891@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4892@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4893@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4894@item CONSTRUCTORS
4895When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4896unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4897destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4898arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4899automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4900For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4901linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4902@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4903ignored for other object file formats.
4904
4905The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4906constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4907Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4908the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4909first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4910of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4911compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4912formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4913@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4914the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4915destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4916@code{exit}.
4917
4918For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4919arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4920addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4921and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4922linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4923runtime code expects to see.
4924
4925@smallexample
4926 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4927 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4928 *(.ctors)
4929 LONG(0)
4930 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4931 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4932 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4933 *(.dtors)
4934 LONG(0)
4935 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4936@end smallexample
4937
4938If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4939which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4940are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4941are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4942command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4943@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4944@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4945@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4946
4947Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4948and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4949need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4950scripts.
4951
4952@end table
4953
4954@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4955@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4956@cindex discarding sections
4957@cindex sections, discarding
4958@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4959The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4960This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4961may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4962@smallexample
49c13adb 4963.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4964@end smallexample
4965@noindent
4966will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4967@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4968sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4969space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4970too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4971space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4972@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4973@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4974This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4975
a0976ea4 4976The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4977on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4978symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4979the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4980section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4981
4982@cindex /DISCARD/
4983The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4984input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4985section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4986
4987@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4988@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4989@cindex output section attributes
4990We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4991like this:
0c71d759 4992
252b5132 4993@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4994@group
7e7d5768 4995@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4996 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 4997 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4998 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4999 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5000 @{
5001 @var{output-section-command}
5002 @var{output-section-command}
5003 @dots{}
562d3460 5004 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5005@end group
5006@end smallexample
0c71d759 5007
252b5132
RH
5008We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5009@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5010remaining section attributes.
5011
a1ab1d2a 5012@menu
252b5132
RH
5013* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5014* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5015* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5016* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5017* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5018* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5019* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5020* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5021@end menu
5022
5023@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5024@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5025Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5026parentheses. The following types are defined:
5027
5028@table @code
5029@item NOLOAD
5030The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5031loaded into memory when the program is run.
5032@item DSECT
5033@itemx COPY
5034@itemx INFO
5035@itemx OVERLAY
5036These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5037rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5038marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5039section when the program is run.
5040@end table
5041
5042@kindex NOLOAD
5043@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5044@cindex loading, preventing
5045The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5046the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5047the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5048@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5049need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5050@smallexample
5051@group
5052SECTIONS @{
5053 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5054 @dots{}
5055@}
5056@end group
5057@end smallexample
5058
5059@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5060@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5061@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5062@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5063@cindex load address
5064@cindex section load address
5065Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5066@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5067@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5068specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5069address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5070
ea5cae92
NC
5071The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5072specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5073takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5074load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5075region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5076
5077If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5078section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5079load address:
5080
5081@itemize @bullet
5082@item
5083If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5084the LMA address as well.
5085
5086@item
5087If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5088
5089@item
5090Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5091with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5092section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5093VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5094the last section in the located region.
5095
5096@item
5097If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5098that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5099
5100@item
5101If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5102section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5103@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5104
5105@cindex ROM initialized data
5106@cindex initialized data in ROM
5107This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5108example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5109called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5110@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5111even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5112uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5113defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5114counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5115
5116@smallexample
5117@group
5118SECTIONS
5119 @{
5120 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5121 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5122 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5123 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5124 .bss 0x3000 :
5125 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5126@}
5127@end group
5128@end smallexample
5129
5130The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5131this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5132the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5133how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5134script.
5135
5136@smallexample
5137@group
5138extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5139char *src = &_etext;
5140char *dst = &_data;
5141
ea5cae92
NC
5142/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5143while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5144 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5145
ea5cae92 5146/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5147for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5148 *dst = 0;
5149@end group
5150@end smallexample
5151
bbf115d3
L
5152@node Forced Output Alignment
5153@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5154@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5155@cindex forcing output section alignment
5156@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5157You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5158alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5159intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5160
7e7d5768
AM
5161@node Forced Input Alignment
5162@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5163@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5164@cindex forcing input section alignment
5165@cindex input section alignment
5166You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5167SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5168sections, whether larger or smaller.
5169
0c71d759
NC
5170@node Output Section Constraint
5171@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5172@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5173@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5174@cindex constraints on output sections
5175You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5176of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5177read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5178@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5179
252b5132 5180@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5181@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5182@kindex >@var{region}
5183@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5184@cindex memory regions and sections
5185You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5186using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5187
5188Here is a simple example:
5189@smallexample
5190@group
5191MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5192SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5193@end group
5194@end smallexample
5195
5196@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5197@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5198@kindex :@var{phdr}
5199@cindex section, assigning to program header
5200@cindex program headers and sections
5201You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5202using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5203one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5204assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5205@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5206linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5207
5208Here is a simple example:
5209@smallexample
5210@group
5211PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5212SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5213@end group
5214@end smallexample
5215
5216@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5217@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5218@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5219@cindex section fill pattern
5220@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5221You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5222@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5223(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5224within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5225alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5226necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5227of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5228an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5229fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5230other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5231pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5232expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5233
5234You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5235output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5236
5237Here is a simple example:
5238@smallexample
5239@group
563e308f 5240SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5241@end group
5242@end smallexample
5243
5244@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5245@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5246@kindex OVERLAY
5247@cindex overlays
5248An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5249are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5250the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5251copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5252required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5253can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5254than another.
5255
5256Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5257@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5258output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5259command is as follows:
5260@smallexample
5261@group
5262OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5263 @{
5264 @var{secname1}
5265 @{
5266 @var{output-section-command}
5267 @var{output-section-command}
5268 @dots{}
5269 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5270 @var{secname2}
5271 @{
5272 @var{output-section-command}
5273 @var{output-section-command}
5274 @dots{}
5275 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5276 @dots{}
abc9061b 5277 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5278@end group
5279@end smallexample
5280
5281Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5282section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5283section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5284those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5285except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5286sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5287
abc9061b
CC
5288The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5289the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5290
252b5132
RH
5291The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5292addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5293memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5294whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5295and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5296and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5297
56dd11f0
NC
5298If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5299references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5300the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5301sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5302@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5303
5304For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5305provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5306defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5307@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5308the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5309within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5310symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5311
5312At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5313the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5314
5315Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5316@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5317@smallexample
5318@group
5319 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5320 @{
5321 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5322 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5323 @}
5324@end group
5325@end smallexample
5326@noindent
5327This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5328address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5329@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5330following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5331@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5332@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5333
5334C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5335like the following.
5336
5337@smallexample
5338@group
5339 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5340 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5341 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5342@end group
5343@end smallexample
5344
5345Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5346everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5347example could have been written identically as follows.
5348
5349@smallexample
5350@group
5351 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5352 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5353 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5354 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5355 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5356 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5357 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5358@end group
5359@end smallexample
5360
5361@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5362@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5363@kindex MEMORY
5364@cindex memory regions
5365@cindex regions of memory
5366@cindex allocating memory
5367@cindex discontinuous memory
5368The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5369memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5370
5371The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5372memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5373may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5374can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5375set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5376regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5377around to fit into the available regions.
5378
127fcdff
AB
5379A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5380however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5381specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5382@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5383@smallexample
5384@group
a1ab1d2a 5385MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5386 @{
5387 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5388 @dots{}
5389 @}
5390@end group
5391@end smallexample
5392
5393The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5394region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5395Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5396with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5397must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5398add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5399command.
252b5132
RH
5400
5401@cindex memory region attributes
5402The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5403whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5404not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5405@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5406section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5407the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5408them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5409
5410The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5411@table @samp
5412@item R
5413Read-only section
5414@item W
5415Read/write section
5416@item X
5417Executable section
5418@item A
5419Allocatable section
5420@item I
5421Initialized section
5422@item L
5423Same as @samp{I}
5424@item !
c09e9a8c 5425Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5426@end table
5427
81c688d5 5428If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5429@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5430attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5431unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5432not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5433string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5434or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5435the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5436
5437@kindex ORIGIN =
5438@kindex o =
5439@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5440The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5441the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5442cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5443abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5444@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5445
5446@kindex LENGTH =
5447@kindex len =
5448@kindex l =
5449The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5450region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5451be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5452@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5453
5454In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5455available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5456and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5457linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5458is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5459or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5460explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5461region.
5462
5463@smallexample
5464@group
a1ab1d2a 5465MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5466 @{
5467 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5468 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5469 @}
5470@end group
5471@end smallexample
5472
5473Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5474specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5475@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5476a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5477output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5478was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5479the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5480output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5481region, the linker will issue an error message.
5482
3ec57632 5483It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5484expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5485@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5486
5487@smallexample
5488@group
c0065db7 5489 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5490@end group
5491@end smallexample
5492
252b5132
RH
5493@node PHDRS
5494@section PHDRS Command
5495@kindex PHDRS
5496@cindex program headers
5497@cindex ELF program headers
5498@cindex program segments
5499@cindex segments, ELF
5500The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5501@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5502loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5503program with the @samp{-p} option.
5504
5505When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5506reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5507program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5508This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5509interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5510
5511The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5512in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5513precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5514the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5515not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5516
5517The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5518generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5519ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5520
5521This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5522@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5523
5524@smallexample
5525@group
5526PHDRS
5527@{
5528 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5529 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5530@}
5531@end group
5532@end smallexample
5533
5534The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5535of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5536header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5537with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5538must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5539is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5540
5541Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5542system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5543specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5544sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5545attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5546Section Phdr}.
5547
5548It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5549merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5550repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5551contain the section.
5552
5553If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5554then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5555not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5556convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5557placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5558default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5559segment at all.
5560
5561@kindex FILEHDR
5562@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5563You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5564the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5565The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5566file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5567include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5568segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5569these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5570
5571The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5572value of the keyword.
5573
5574@table @asis
5575@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5576Indicates an unused program header.
5577
5578@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5579Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5580the file.
5581
5582@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5583Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5584
5585@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5586Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5587found.
5588
5589@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5590Indicates a segment holding note information.
5591
5592@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5593A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5594ABI.
5595
5596@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5597Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5598
1a9ccd70
NC
5599@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5600Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5601
252b5132
RH
5602@item @var{expression}
5603An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5604be used for types not defined above.
5605@end table
5606
5607You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5608in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5609@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5610Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5611output section attribute.
5612
5613The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5614which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5615explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5616an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5617header.
5618
5619Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5620headers used on a native ELF system.
5621
5622@example
5623@group
5624PHDRS
5625@{
5626 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5627 interp PT_INTERP ;
5628 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5629 data PT_LOAD ;
5630 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5631@}
5632
5633SECTIONS
5634@{
5635 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5636 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5637 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5638 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5639 @dots{}
5640 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5641 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5642 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5643 @dots{}
5644@}
5645@end group
5646@end example
5647
5648@node VERSION
5649@section VERSION Command
5650@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5651@cindex symbol versions
5652@cindex version script
5653@cindex versions of symbols
5654The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5655only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5656symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5657a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5658shared library.
5659
5660You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5661you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5662also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5663
5664The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5665@smallexample
5666VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5667@end smallexample
5668
5669The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5670Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5671version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5672version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5673version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5674scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5675library.
5676
5677The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5678examples.
5679
5680@smallexample
5681VERS_1.1 @{
5682 global:
5683 foo1;
5684 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5685 old*;
5686 original*;
5687 new*;
252b5132
RH
5688@};
5689
5690VERS_1.2 @{
5691 foo2;
5692@} VERS_1.1;
5693
5694VERS_2.0 @{
5695 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5696 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5697 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5698 "f(int, double)";
5699 @};
252b5132
RH
5700@} VERS_1.2;
5701@end smallexample
5702
5703This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5704version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5705The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5706a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5707of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5708symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5709is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5710in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5711However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5712name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5713
5714Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5715depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5716to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5717
5718Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5719depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5720and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5721
5722When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5723specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5724unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5725unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5726somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5727wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5728wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5729set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5730ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5731
5732The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5733they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5734could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5735However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5736
0f6bf451 5737Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5738in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5739symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5740won't.
5741
5742@smallexample
7c9c73be 5743@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5744@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5745
252b5132
RH
5746When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5747symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5748requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5749shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5750loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5751linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5752application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5753way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5754all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5755search for each symbol reference.
5756
5757The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5758doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5759that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5760functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5761the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5762required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5763that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5764versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5765the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5766
5767There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5768first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5769source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5770script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5771maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5772@smallexample
5773__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5774@end smallexample
5775@noindent
5776in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5777be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5778The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5779@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5780takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5781
5782The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5783function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5784an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5785version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5786linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5787
5788To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5789source file. Here is an example:
5790
5791@smallexample
5792__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5793__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5794__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5795__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5796@end smallexample
5797
5798In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5799unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5800example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5801@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5802
5803When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5804some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5805this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5806@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5807declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5808you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5809
5810If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5811within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5812(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5813specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5814
cb840a31
L
5815You can also specify the language in the version script:
5816
5817@smallexample
5818VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5819@end smallexample
5820
c0065db7 5821The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5822The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5823demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5824patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5825@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5826
86043bbb
MM
5827Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5828described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5829or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5830the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5831whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5832cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5833might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5834should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5835expect when you upgrade.
5836
252b5132
RH
5837@node Expressions
5838@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5839@cindex expressions
5840@cindex arithmetic
5841The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5842that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5843expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5844host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5845
5846You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5847
5848The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5849expressions.
5850
5851@menu
5852* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5853* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5854* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5855* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5856* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5857* Operators:: Operators
5858* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5859* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5860* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5861@end menu
5862
5863@node Constants
5864@subsection Constants
5865@cindex integer notation
5866@cindex constants in linker scripts
5867All constants are integers.
5868
5869As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5870octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5871hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5872@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5873@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5874value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5875
5876@cindex scaled integers
5877@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5878@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5879@cindex suffixes for integers
5880@cindex integer suffixes
5881In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5882constant by
5883@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5884@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5885@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5886@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5887@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5888@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5889@tex
5890${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5891@end tex
5892@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5893respectively. For example, the following
5894all refer to the same quantity:
5895
252b5132 5896@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5897_fourk_1 = 4K;
5898_fourk_2 = 4096;
5899_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5900_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5901@end smallexample
5902
8a308ae8
NC
5903Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5904conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5905
0c71d759
NC
5906@node Symbolic Constants
5907@subsection Symbolic Constants
5908@cindex symbolic constants
5909@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5910It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5911the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5912
5913@table @code
5914@item MAXPAGESIZE
5915@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5916The target's maximum page size.
5917
5918@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5919@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5920The target's default page size.
5921@end table
5922
5923So for example:
5924
5925@smallexample
9d5777a3 5926 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5927@end smallexample
5928
5929will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5930supported by the target.
5931
252b5132
RH
5932@node Symbols
5933@subsection Symbol Names
5934@cindex symbol names
5935@cindex names
5936@cindex quoted symbol names
5937@kindex "
5938Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5939and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5940Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5941specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5942keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5943@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5944"SECTION" = 9;
5945"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5946@end smallexample
5947
5948Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5949to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5950whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5951
ecca9871
L
5952@node Orphan Sections
5953@subsection Orphan Sections
5954@cindex orphan
5955Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5956are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5957script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5958output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5959in which to place the orphaned input section.
5960
5961If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5962an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5963placed at the end of that output section.
5964
5965If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5966sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5967name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5968orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5969one new output section.
5970
5971If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5972then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5973in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5974linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5975attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5976sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5977support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5978
a05a5b64
TP
5979The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5980(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5981output sections an orphan is placed in.
5982
252b5132
RH
5983@node Location Counter
5984@subsection The Location Counter
5985@kindex .
5986@cindex dot
5987@cindex location counter
5988@cindex current output location
5989The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5990current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5991location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5992within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5993anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5994
5995@cindex holes
5996Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5997moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5998location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5999and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6000doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6001
6002@smallexample
6003SECTIONS
6004@{
6005 output :
6006 @{
6007 file1(.text)
6008 . = . + 1000;
6009 file2(.text)
6010 . += 1000;
6011 file3(.text)
563e308f 6012 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6013@}
6014@end smallexample
6015@noindent
6016In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6017located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6018followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6019@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6020@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6021specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6022
5c6bbab8
NC
6023@cindex dot inside sections
6024Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6025current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6026statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6027absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6028however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6029not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6030
6031@smallexample
6032SECTIONS
6033@{
6034 . = 0x100
6035 .text: @{
6036 *(.text)
6037 . = 0x200
6038 @}
6039 . = 0x500
6040 .data: @{
6041 *(.data)
6042 . += 0x600
6043 @}
6044@}
6045@end smallexample
6046
6047The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6048and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6049the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6050much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6051move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6052and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6053the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6054the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6055
b5666f2f
AM
6056@cindex dot outside sections
6057Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6058output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6059needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6060
6061@smallexample
6062SECTIONS
6063@{
6064 start_of_text = . ;
6065 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6066 end_of_text = . ;
6067
6068 start_of_data = . ;
6069 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6070 end_of_data = . ;
6071@}
6072@end smallexample
6073
6074If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6075not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6076between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6077should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6078blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6079the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6080sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6081statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6082special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6083place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6084as follows:
6085
6086@smallexample
6087SECTIONS
6088@{
6089 start_of_text = . ;
6090 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6091 end_of_text = . ;
6092
6093 start_of_data = . ;
6094 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6095 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6096 end_of_data = . ;
6097@}
6098@end smallexample
6099
6100This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6101@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6102placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6103assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6104a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6105section. So you could write:
6106
6107@smallexample
6108SECTIONS
6109@{
6110 start_of_text = . ;
6111 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6112 end_of_text = . ;
6113
6114 . = . ;
6115 start_of_data = . ;
6116 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6117 end_of_data = . ;
6118@}
6119@end smallexample
6120
6121Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6122@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6123
252b5132
RH
6124@need 2000
6125@node Operators
6126@subsection Operators
6127@cindex operators for arithmetic
6128@cindex arithmetic operators
6129@cindex precedence in expressions
6130The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6131the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6132@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6133@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6134@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6135@smallexample
6136precedence associativity Operators Notes
6137(highest)
61381 left ! - ~ (1)
61392 left * / %
61403 left + -
61414 left >> <<
61425 left == != > < <= >=
61436 left &
61447 left |
61458 left &&
61469 left ||
614710 right ? :
614811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6149(lowest)
6150@end smallexample
6151Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6152(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6153(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6154@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6155@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6156@tex
6157\vskip \baselineskip
6158%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6159\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6160\hrule
6161\halign
6162{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6163height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6164&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6165height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6166\noalign{\hrule}
6167height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6168&highest&&&&&\cr
6169% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6170&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6171&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6172&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6173&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6174&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6175&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6176&7&&left&&|&\cr
6177&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6178&9&&left&&||&\cr
6179&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6180&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6181&lowest&&&&&\cr
6182height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6183\hrule}
6184@end tex
6185@iftex
6186{
6187@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6188@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6189@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6190}
6191@end iftex
6192@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6193
6194@node Evaluation
6195@subsection Evaluation
6196@cindex lazy evaluation
6197@cindex expression evaluation order
6198The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6199an expression when absolutely necessary.
6200
6201The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6202address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6203regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6204as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6205
6206However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6207until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6208other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6209for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6210
6211The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6212assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6213allocation.
6214
6215Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6216@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6217
6218If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6219available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6220following
6221@smallexample
6222@group
6223SECTIONS
6224 @{
a1ab1d2a 6225 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6226 @{ *(.text) @}
6227 @}
6228@end group
6229@end smallexample
6230@noindent
6231will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6232address}.
6233
6234@node Expression Section
6235@subsection The Section of an Expression
6236@cindex expression sections
6237@cindex absolute expressions
6238@cindex relative expressions
6239@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6240@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6241@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6242Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6243relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6244using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6245value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6246symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6247operations.
6248
abf4be64
AM
6249Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6250section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6251address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6252@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6253functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6254One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6255(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6256differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6257versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6258section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6259Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6260absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6261given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6262everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6263
6264In the following simple example,
252b5132 6265
7542af2a
AM
6266@smallexample
6267@group
6268SECTIONS
6269 @{
6270 . = 0x100;
6271 __executable_start = 0x100;
6272 .data :
6273 @{
6274 . = 0x10;
6275 __data_start = 0x10;
6276 *(.data)
6277 @}
6278 @dots{}
6279 @}
6280@end group
6281@end smallexample
252b5132 6282
7542af2a
AM
6283both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6284address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6285@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6286section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6287
5c3049d2
AM
6288For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6289addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6290
6291@itemize @bullet
6292@item
c05f749e
AM
6293Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6294operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6295absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6296@item
7542af2a
AM
6297Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6298relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6299and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6300@item
c05f749e
AM
6301Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6302in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6303address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6304before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6305@end itemize
6306
6307The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6308
6309@itemize @bullet
6310@item
6311An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6312@item
6313The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6314@item
9bc8bb33 6315The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6316relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6317(after above conversions) is also a number when
6318@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6319but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6320@item
6321The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6322relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6323section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6324@item
6325The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6326conversions) is an absolute address.
6327@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6328
6329You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6330to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6331create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6332section @samp{.data}:
6333@smallexample
6334SECTIONS
6335 @{
6336 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6337 @}
6338@end smallexample
6339@noindent
6340If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6341@samp{.data} section.
6342
7542af2a
AM
6343Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6344particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6345
252b5132
RH
6346@node Builtin Functions
6347@subsection Builtin Functions
6348@cindex functions in expressions
6349The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6350use in linker script expressions.
6351
6352@table @code
6353@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6354@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6355@cindex expression, absolute
6356Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6357of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6358value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6359normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6360
6361@item ADDR(@var{section})
6362@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6363@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6364Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6365script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6366the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6367@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6368@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6369the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6370@smallexample
6371@group
6372SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6373 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6374 @{
252b5132
RH
6375 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6376 @dots{}
6377 @}
6378 .output :
6379 @{
6380 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6381 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6382 @}
6383@dots{} @}
6384@end group
6385@end smallexample
6386
876f4090
NS
6387@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6388@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6389@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6390@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6391@cindex round up location counter
6392@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6393@cindex round up expression
6394@cindex align expression
6395Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6396to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6397doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6398arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6399expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6400equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6401
6402Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6403next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6404variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6405input sections:
252b5132
RH
6406@smallexample
6407@group
6408SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6409 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6410 *(.data)
6411 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6412 @}
6413@dots{} @}
6414@end group
6415@end smallexample
6416@noindent
6417The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6418a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6419a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6420of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6421
6422The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6423
362c1d1a
NS
6424@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6425@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6426@cindex section alignment
6427Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6428been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6429evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6430the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6431value in that section.
6432@smallexample
6433@group
6434SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6435 .output @{
6436 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6437 @dots{}
6438 @}
6439@dots{} @}
6440@end group
6441@end smallexample
6442
252b5132
RH
6443@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6444@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6445This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6446scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6447section.
6448
2d20f7bf
JJ
6449@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6450@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6451This is equivalent to either
6452@smallexample
6453(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6454@end smallexample
6455or
6456@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6457(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6458 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6459@end smallexample
6460@noindent
6461depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6462for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6463@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6464If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6465memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6466bytes in the on-disk file.
6467
6468This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6469any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6470@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6471be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6472running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6473that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6474page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6475
6476@noindent
6477Example:
6478@smallexample
6479 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6480@end smallexample
6481
6482@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6483@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6484This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6485evaluation purposes.
6486
6487@smallexample
6488 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6489@end smallexample
6490
a4f5ad88
JJ
6491@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6492@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6493This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6494@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6495When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6496does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6497@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6498argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6499script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6500@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6501padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6502section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6503
6504@smallexample
6505 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6506@end smallexample
6507
252b5132
RH
6508@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6509@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6510@cindex symbol defaults
6511Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6512defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6513return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6514default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6515shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6516the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6517existed, its value is preserved:
6518
6519@smallexample
6520@group
6521SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6522 .text : @{
6523 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6524 @dots{}
6525 @}
6526 @dots{}
6527@}
6528@end group
6529@end smallexample
6530
3ec57632
NC
6531@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6532@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6533Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6534
252b5132
RH
6535@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6536@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6537@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6538Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6539Section LMA}).
6540
2e53f7d6
NC
6541@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6542@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6543Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6544@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6545
252b5132
RH
6546@kindex MAX
6547@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6548Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6549
6550@kindex MIN
6551@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6552Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6553
6554@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6555@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6556@cindex unallocated address, next
6557Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6558This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6559use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6560output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6561
3ec57632
NC
6562@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6563@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6564Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6565
ba916c8a
MM
6566@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6567@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6568Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6569value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6570@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6571will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6572can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6573``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6574name.
6575
252b5132
RH
6576@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6577@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6578@cindex section size
6579Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6580been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6581evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6582@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6583@smallexample
6584@group
6585SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6586 .output @{
6587 .start = . ;
6588 @dots{}
6589 .end = . ;
6590 @}
6591 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6592 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6593@dots{} @}
6594@end group
6595@end smallexample
6596
6597@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6598@itemx sizeof_headers
6599@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6600@cindex header size
6601Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6602information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6603this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6604choose, to facilitate paging.
6605
6606@cindex not enough room for program headers
6607@cindex program headers, not enough room
6608When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6609@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6610number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6611addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6612additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6613room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6614the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6615script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6616you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6617command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6618@end table
6619
6620@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6621@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6622@cindex implicit linker scripts
6623If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6624an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6625linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6626linker will report an error.
6627
6628An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6629
6630Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6631assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6632commands.
6633
6634Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6635at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6636read. This can affect archive searching.
6637
6638@ifset GENERIC
6639@node Machine Dependent
6640@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6641
6642@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6643@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6644sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6645functionality are not listed.
6646
6647@menu
36f63dca
NC
6648@ifset H8300
6649* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6650@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6651@ifset M68HC11
6652* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6653@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6654@ifset ARM
6655* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6656@end ifset
6657@ifset HPPA
6658* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6659@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6660@ifset M68K
6661* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6662@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6663@ifset MIPS
6664* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6665@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6666@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6667* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6668@end ifset
2469cfa2 6669@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6670* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6671@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6672@ifset NDS32
6673* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6674@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6675@ifset NIOSII
6676* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6677@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6678@ifset POWERPC
6679* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6680@end ifset
6681@ifset POWERPC64
6682* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6683@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6684@ifset S/390
6685* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6686@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6687@ifset SPU
6688* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6689@end ifset
74459f0e 6690@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6691* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6692@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6693@ifset WIN32
6694* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6695@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6696@ifset XTENSA
6697* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6698@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6699@end menu
6700@end ifset
6701
252b5132
RH
6702@ifset H8300
6703@ifclear GENERIC
6704@raisesections
6705@end ifclear
6706
6707@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6708@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6709
6710@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6711For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6712you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6713
6714@table @emph
6715@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6716@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6717@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6718targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6719program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6720respectively.
6721
6722@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6723@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6724@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6725@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6726sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6727page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6728(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6729@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6730top page of memory).
1502569c 6731
81f5558e
NC
6732@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6733indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6734displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6735the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6736@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6737whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6738range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6739
1502569c 6740@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6741@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6742biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6743which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6744page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6745(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6746@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6747the top page of memory).
6748
6749@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6750@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
675132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6752changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6753(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6754@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6755the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6756@end table
6757
6758@ifclear GENERIC
6759@lowersections
6760@end ifclear
6761@end ifset
6762
36f63dca 6763@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6764@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6765@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6766@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6767@node Renesas
6768@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6769
c2dcd04e
NC
6770@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6771H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6772options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6773@end ifset
6774@end ifclear
6775
36f63dca
NC
6776@ifset ARM
6777@ifclear GENERIC
6778@raisesections
6779@end ifclear
6780
93fd0973
SC
6781@ifset M68HC11
6782@ifclear GENERIC
6783@raisesections
6784@end ifclear
6785
6786@node M68HC11/68HC12
6787@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6788
6789@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6790
6791@subsection Linker Relaxation
6792
6793For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6794optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6795
6796@table @emph
6797@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6798@item relaxing address modes
6799@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6800targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6801program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6802respectively.
6803
6804@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6805transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6806page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6807
6808@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6809When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6810of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6811addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6812@code{bset} instructions.
6813
6814@end table
6815
6816@subsection Trampoline Generation
6817
6818@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6819@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6820For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6821call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6822will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6823trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6824case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6825point to the function trampoline.
6826
6827@ifclear GENERIC
6828@lowersections
6829@end ifclear
6830@end ifset
6831
36f63dca 6832@node ARM
3674e28a 6833@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6834
6835@cindex ARM interworking support
6836@kindex --support-old-code
6837For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6838between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6839been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6840line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6841libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6842option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6843given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6844which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6845the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6846non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6847
6848@cindex thumb entry point
6849@cindex entry point, thumb
6850@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6851The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6852@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6853But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6854branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6855executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6856
ce11ba6c
KT
6857@cindex PE import table prefixing
6858@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6859The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6860the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6861element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6862import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6863
e489d0ae
PB
6864@cindex BE8
6865@kindex --be8
6866The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6867executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6868objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6869option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6870little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6871
3674e28a
PB
6872@cindex TARGET1
6873@kindex --target1-rel
6874@kindex --target1-abs
6875The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6876@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6877or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6878and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6879
6880@cindex TARGET2
6881@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6882The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6883@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6884meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6885@table @samp
6886@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6887@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6888@item abs
6889@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6890@item got-rel
6891@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6892@end table
6893
319850b4
JB
6894@cindex FIX_V4BX
6895@kindex --fix-v4bx
6896The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6897specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6898interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6899also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6900
6901In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6902linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6903@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6904
6905In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6906relocations are ignored.
6907
845b51d6
PB
6908@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6909@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6910Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6911relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6912
6913@smallexample
6914TST rM, #1
6915MOVEQ PC, rM
6916BX Rn
6917@end smallexample
6918
6919This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6920and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6921condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6922
33bfe774
JB
6923@cindex USE_BLX
6924@kindex --use-blx
6925The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6926BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6927situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6928code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6929each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6930
6931This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6932specify it if you are using that target.
6933
c6dd86c6
JB
6934@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6935@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6936The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6937bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6938instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6939to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6940the support code can read the intended values.
6941
6942The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6943intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6944and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6945intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6946full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6947you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6948
6949If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6950enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6951@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6952mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6953vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6954@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6955
6956If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6957potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6958such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6959first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6960instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6961the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6962are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6963
2de70689
MGD
6964@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6965@kindex --fix-arm1176
6966@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6967The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6968in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6969are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6970unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6971
9d5777a3 6972Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6973Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6974http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6975
a504d23a
LA
6976@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6977@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6978
6979The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6980workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6981the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6982off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6983the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6984core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6985integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6986VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6987
6988The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6989necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6990
6991The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6992@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6993STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6994linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6995@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6996
6997If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6998potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6999such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7000replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7001branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7002then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7003
7004The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7005the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7006
7007The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7008they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7009there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7010occurs.
7011
7012The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7013PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7014large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7015cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7016occurs.
7017
bf21ed78
MS
7018@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7019@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7020The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7021warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7022enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7023linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7024using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7025not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7026
7027@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7028@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7029The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7030warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7031@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7032linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7033using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7034
726150b7
NC
7035@cindex PIC_VENEER
7036@kindex --pic-veneer
7037The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7038ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7039is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7040@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7041
7042@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7043@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7044The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7045code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7046perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7047placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7048controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7049The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7050duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7051group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7052code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7053where they should be placed.
7054
7055The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7056@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7057placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7058branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7059placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7060value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7061exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7062A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7063linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7064from the input sections.
7065
7066The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7067@samp{N = +1}.
7068
1a51c1a4
NC
7069Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7070only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7071otherwise.
7072
1db37fe6
YG
7073@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7074@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7075@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7076The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7077
7078The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7079
68fcca92
JW
7080@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7081@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7082@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7083The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7084
7085Please contact ARM for further details.
7086
1db37fe6
YG
7087@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7088@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7089@cindex Merging exidx entries
7090The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7091
7092@kindex --long-plt
7093@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7094The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7095which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7096entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7097
1f56df9d
JW
7098@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7099@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7100The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7101link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7102
4ba2ef8f
TP
7103@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7104All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7105Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7106@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7107veneers in memory.
7108
54ddd295
TP
7109@kindex --cmse-implib
7110@cindex Secure gateway import library
7111The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7112specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7113secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7114executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7115
0955507f
TP
7116@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7117@cindex Input import library
7118The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7119must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7120given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7121in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7122@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7123library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7124library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7125for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7126specified.
7127
36f63dca
NC
7128@ifclear GENERIC
7129@lowersections
7130@end ifclear
7131@end ifset
7132
7133@ifset HPPA
7134@ifclear GENERIC
7135@raisesections
7136@end ifclear
7137
7138@node HPPA ELF32
7139@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7140@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7141@kindex --multi-subspace
7142When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7143import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7144The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7145stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7146multiple sub-spaces.
7147
7148@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7149@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7150Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7151stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7152@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7153sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7154a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7155the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7156conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7157prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7158A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7159branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7160@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7161@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7162detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7163positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7164
7165Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7166single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7167create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7168large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7169
7170@ifclear GENERIC
7171@lowersections
7172@end ifclear
7173@end ifset
7174
7fb9f789
NC
7175@ifset M68K
7176@ifclear GENERIC
7177@raisesections
7178@end ifclear
7179
7180@node M68K
7181@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7182
7183@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7184@kindex --got=@var{type}
7185The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7186The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7187@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7188the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7189@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7190entries only at non-negative offsets.
7191@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7192entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7193support such GOTs.
7194@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7195output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7196file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7197files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7198
7199@ifclear GENERIC
7200@lowersections
7201@end ifclear
7202@end ifset
7203
833794fc
MR
7204@ifset MIPS
7205@ifclear GENERIC
7206@raisesections
7207@end ifclear
7208
7209@node MIPS
7210@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7211
7212@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7213@kindex --insn32
7214@kindex --no-insn32
7215The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7216microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7217in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7218used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7219or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7220including 16-bit ones where possible.
7221
8b10b0b3
MR
7222@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7223@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7224@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7225The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7226control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7227@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7228relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7229calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7230relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7231instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7232or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7233the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7234
833794fc
MR
7235@ifclear GENERIC
7236@lowersections
7237@end ifclear
7238@end ifset
7239
36f63dca
NC
7240@ifset MMIX
7241@ifclear GENERIC
7242@raisesections
7243@end ifclear
7244
7245@node MMIX
7246@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7247For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7248@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7249understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7250can translate between the two formats.
7251
7252There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7253Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7254registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7255equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7256@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7257global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7258this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7259symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7260
7a2de473
HPN
7261Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7262@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7263The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7264of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7265
7266Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7267are left out from an mmo file.
7268
7269@ifclear GENERIC
7270@lowersections
7271@end ifclear
7272@end ifset
7273
7274@ifset MSP430
7275@ifclear GENERIC
7276@raisesections
7277@end ifclear
7278
7279@node MSP430
7280@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7281For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7282will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7283just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7284
7285@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7286The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7287
7288@table @code
7289@item @samp{.vectors}
7290Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7291
7292@item @samp{.bootloader}
7293Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7294in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7295
7296@item @samp{.infomem}
7297Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7298this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7299
c0065db7 7300@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7301This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7302in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7303
7304@item @samp{.noinit}
7305Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7306
c0065db7 7307The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7308@end table
7309
7ef3addb
JL
7310@table @option
7311@cindex MSP430 Options
7312@kindex --code-region
7313@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7314This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7315argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7316using this option.
7317
7318@kindex --data-region
7319@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7320This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7321[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7322for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7323
7324@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7325@item --disable-sec-transformation
7326Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7327and @code{--data-region} options.
7328This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7329wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7330not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7331@end table
7332
36f63dca
NC
7333@ifclear GENERIC
7334@lowersections
7335@end ifclear
7336@end ifset
7337
35c08157
KLC
7338@ifset NDS32
7339@ifclear GENERIC
7340@raisesections
7341@end ifclear
7342
7343@node NDS32
7344@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7345@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7346For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7347relaxes objects according to these options.
7348
7349@table @code
7350@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7351Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7352
7353@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7354Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7355
7356@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7357Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7358
7359@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7360Export the EX9 table after linking.
7361
7362@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7363Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7364
7365@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7366Update the existing EX9 table.
7367
7368@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7369Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7370
7371@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7372Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7373
7374@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7375Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7376
7377@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7378Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7379@end table
7380
7381@ifclear GENERIC
7382@lowersections
7383@end ifclear
7384@end ifset
7385
78058a5e
SL
7386@ifset NIOSII
7387@ifclear GENERIC
7388@raisesections
7389@end ifclear
7390
7391@node Nios II
7392@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7393@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7394@kindex --relax on Nios II
7395
7396Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7397transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7398which may result in @command{ld} giving
7399@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7400The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7401trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7402outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7403trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7404be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7405larger than 256MB.
7406
7407The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7408is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7409@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7410locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7411source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7412register as a temporary.
7413
7414Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7415relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7416option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7417
7418@ifclear GENERIC
7419@lowersections
7420@end ifclear
7421@end ifset
7422
2a60a7a8
AM
7423@ifset POWERPC
7424@ifclear GENERIC
7425@raisesections
7426@end ifclear
7427
7428@node PowerPC ELF32
7429@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7430@cindex PowerPC long branches
7431@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7432Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7433displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7434@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7435@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7436the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7437section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7438section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7439@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7440both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7441considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7442
7443@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7444@table @option
7445@cindex PowerPC PLT
7446@kindex --bss-plt
7447@item --bss-plt
7448Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7449generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7450the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7451writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7452@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7453PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7454compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7455BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7456
016687f8
AM
7457@kindex --secure-plt
7458@item --secure-plt
7459@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7460@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7461when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7462layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7463style BSS PLT.
7464
2a60a7a8
AM
7465@cindex PowerPC GOT
7466@kindex --sdata-got
7467@item --sdata-got
7468The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7469sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7470@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7471section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7472@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7473@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7474@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7475@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7476PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7477pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7478GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7479really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7480
7481@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7482@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7483@item --emit-stub-syms
7484This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7485symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7486
7487@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7488@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7489@item --no-tls-optimize
7490PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7491sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7492disable the optimization.
7493@end table
7494
7495@ifclear GENERIC
7496@lowersections
7497@end ifclear
7498@end ifset
7499
7500@ifset POWERPC64
7501@ifclear GENERIC
7502@raisesections
7503@end ifclear
7504
7505@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7506@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7507
7508@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7509@table @option
7510@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7511@kindex --stub-group-size
7512@item --stub-group-size
7513Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7514by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7515@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7516sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7517a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7518the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7519conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7520prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7521A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7522branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7523@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7524@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7525detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7526positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7527
7528Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7529single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7530create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7531large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7532
7533@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7534@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7535@item --emit-stub-syms
7536This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7537symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7538
7539@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7540@kindex --dotsyms
7541@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7542@item --dotsyms
7543@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7544These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7545in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7546function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7547code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7548properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7549to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7550@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7551dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7552feature.
7553
7ae4ea7d
AM
7554@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7555@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7556@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7557@item --save-restore-funcs
7558@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7559These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7560provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7561@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7562function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7563link.
7564
2a60a7a8
AM
7565@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7566@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7567@item --no-tls-optimize
7568PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7569sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7570disable the optimization.
7571
7c9cf415
AM
7572@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7573@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7574@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7575@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7576@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7577These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7578stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7579an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7580@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7581stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7582option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7583Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7584slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7585application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7586normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7587
2a60a7a8
AM
7588@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7589@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7590@item --no-opd-optimize
7591PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7592corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7593the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7594Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7595
7596@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7597@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7598@item --non-overlapping-opd
7599Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7600@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7601the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7602entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7603
7604@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7605@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7606@item --no-toc-optimize
7607PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7608entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7609reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7610marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7611marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7612relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7613unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7614reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7615discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7616reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7617code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7618optimization.
7619
7620@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7621@kindex --no-multi-toc
7622@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7623If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7624@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7625where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7626entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7627total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7628grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7629TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7630calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7631help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
763264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7633Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7634
7635@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7636@kindex --no-toc-sort
7637@item --no-toc-sort
7638By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7639happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7640placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7641with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7642referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7643@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7644results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7645off this feature.
7646
7647@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7648@kindex --plt-align
7649@kindex --no-plt-align
7650@item --plt-align
7651@itemx --no-plt-align
7652Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7653aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7654boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7655specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7656specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7657if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7658PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7659
7660@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7661@kindex --plt-static-chain
7662@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7663@item --plt-static-chain
7664@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7665Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7666chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7667chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7668
7669@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7670@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7671@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7672@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7673@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7674With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7675lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7676another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7677order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7678memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7679barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7680looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7681seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7682default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7683
7684@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7685@kindex --plt-localentry
7686@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7687@item --plt-localentry
7688@itemx --no-localentry
7689ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7690ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7691(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7692Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7693or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7694functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7695in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7696interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7697including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7698to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7699complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7700care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7701@end table
7702
7703@ifclear GENERIC
7704@lowersections
7705@end ifclear
7706@end ifset
7707
b4cbbe8f
AK
7708@ifset S/390
7709@ifclear GENERIC
7710@raisesections
7711@end ifclear
7712
7713@node S/390 ELF
7714@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7715
7716@cindex S/390 ELF options
7717@table @option
7718
7719@cindex S/390
7720@kindex --s390-pgste
7721@item --s390-pgste
7722This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7723segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7724binaries marked that way.
7725@end table
7726
7727@ifclear GENERIC
7728@lowersections
7729@end ifclear
7730@end ifset
7731
49fa1e15
AM
7732@ifset SPU
7733@ifclear GENERIC
7734@raisesections
7735@end ifclear
7736
7737@node SPU ELF
7738@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7739
7740@cindex SPU ELF options
7741@table @option
7742
7743@cindex SPU plugins
7744@kindex --plugin
7745@item --plugin
7746This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7747
7748@cindex SPU overlays
7749@kindex --no-overlays
7750@item --no-overlays
7751Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7752regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7753@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7754turns off all this special overlay handling.
7755
7756@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7757@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7758@item --emit-stub-syms
7759This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7760symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7761
7762@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7763@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7764@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7765This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7766function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7767on calls to non-overlay regions.
7768
7769@cindex SPU local store size
7770@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7771@item --local-store=lo:hi
7772@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7773the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7774range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7775
c0065db7 7776@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7777@kindex --stack-analysis
7778@item --stack-analysis
7779SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7780unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7781under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7782@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7783@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7784determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7785for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7786for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7787for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7788find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7789and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7790under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7791dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7792is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7793and calls will be given.
7794
c0065db7 7795@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7796@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7797@item --emit-stack-syms
7798This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7799in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7800These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7801functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7802functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7803such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7804The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7805@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7806@end table
7807
7808@ifclear GENERIC
7809@lowersections
7810@end ifclear
7811@end ifset
7812
36f63dca
NC
7813@ifset TICOFF
7814@ifclear GENERIC
7815@raisesections
7816@end ifclear
7817
7818@node TI COFF
7819@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7820@cindex TI COFF versions
7821@kindex --format=@var{version}
7822The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7823TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7824also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7825format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7826header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7827
7828@ifclear GENERIC
7829@lowersections
7830@end ifclear
7831@end ifset
7832
2ca22b03
NC
7833@ifset WIN32
7834@ifclear GENERIC
7835@raisesections
7836@end ifclear
7837
7838@node WIN32
7839@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7840
c0065db7 7841This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7842See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7843command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7844
7845@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7846@cindex import libraries
7847@item import libraries
69da35b5 7848The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7849libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7850regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7851archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7852support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7853@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7854
c0065db7
RM
7855@item exporting DLL symbols
7856@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7857The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7858
7859@table @emph
7860@item using auto-export functionality
7861@cindex using auto-export functionality
7862By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7863which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7864
0a5d968e
NC
7865@itemize
7866@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7867@item --exclude-symbols
7868@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7869@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7870@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7871@end itemize
7872
09e2aba4
DK
7873When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7874(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7875symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7876often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7877private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7878options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7879exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7880final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7881
7882If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7883command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7884if either of the following are true:
7885
7886@itemize
7887@item A DEF file is used.
7888@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7889@end itemize
dc8465bf 7890
c0065db7
RM
7891@item using a DEF file
7892@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7893Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7894an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7895exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7896name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7897command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7898
7899@example
7900gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7901@end example
7902
0a5d968e
NC
7903Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7904@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7905
dc8465bf
NC
7906Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7907
7908@example
4b5bd4e7 7909LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7910
7911EXPORTS
7912foo
7913bar
7914_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7915another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7916var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7917doo = foo == foo2
7918eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7919@end example
dc8465bf 7920
7fcab871 7921This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7922symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7923alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7924by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7925@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7926@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7927export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7928in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7929symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7930
6b31ad16
DS
7931The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7932name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7933the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7934
b45619c0
NC
7935When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7936library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7937@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7938executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7939
7940With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7941specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7942non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7943
7944If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7945or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7946filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7947
4b5bd4e7
DS
7948The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7949
7950@example
7951EXPORTS
7952 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7953 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7954 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7955@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7956
7957Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7958@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7959@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7960@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7961Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7962@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7963string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7964
7965The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7966
7967@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7968will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7969by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7970linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7971library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7972
7973@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7974The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7975the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7976@code{*_imp__foo}).
7977
7978@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7979well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7980read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7981variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7982the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7983extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7984application will behave unexpectedly.
7985
7986@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7987it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7988symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7989API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7990the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7991
4b5bd4e7
DS
7992See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7993other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7994
7995@cindex creating a DEF file
7996While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7997with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7998
7999@item Using decorations
8000@cindex Using decorations
8001Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8002itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8003declared as:
8004
8005@example
8006__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8007__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8008@end example
8009
8010All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8011any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8012this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8013the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8014
8015Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8016decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8017instead:
8018
8019@example
8020__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8021__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8022@end example
8023
c0065db7
RM
8024This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8025when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8026variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8027code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8028of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8029omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8030@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8031information.
c0065db7 8032@end table
dc8465bf 8033
2ca22b03
NC
8034@cindex automatic data imports
8035@item automatic data imports
8036The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8037by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8038compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8039issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8040code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8041c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8042initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8043decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8044platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8045command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8046The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8047suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8048trigger the feature's use.
8049
c0065db7 8050auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8051additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8052
c0065db7 8053"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8054documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8055
c0065db7
RM
8056The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8057occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8058One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8059below.
8060
8061@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8062For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8063object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8064offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8065field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8066in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8067without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8068The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8069references.
8070
c0065db7
RM
8071The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8072be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8073themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8074runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8075compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8076support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8077run without error on an older system.
8078
c0065db7
RM
8079@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8080enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8081
8082@cindex direct linking to a dll
8083@item direct linking to a dll
8084The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8085including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8086libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8087traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8088libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8089function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8090though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8091storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8092tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8093large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8094
c0065db7 8095Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8096@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8097of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8098perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8099select the dll instead of an import library.
8100
2ca22b03 8101
69da35b5
NC
8102For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8103to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8104
8105@example
45e948fe
NC
8106libxxx.dll.a
8107xxx.dll.a
8108libxxx.a
8109xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8110libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8111cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8112libxxx.dll
8113xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8114@end example
8115
69da35b5
NC
8116before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8117
c0065db7
RM
8118(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8119where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8120@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8121file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8122@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8123
c0065db7
RM
8124Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8125@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8126was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8127various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8128could coexist on the same machine.
8129
2ca22b03
NC
8130The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8131applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8132libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8133
8134@example
8135bin/
8136 cygxxx.dll
8137lib/
8138 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8139 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8140@end example
8141
c0065db7
RM
8142Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8143done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8144
81451. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8146@example
8147gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8148@end example
2ca22b03 8149
69da35b5
NC
8150However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8151(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8152@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8153not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8154
2ca22b03
NC
81552. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8156directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8157should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8158making the app/dll.
8159
8160@example
8161ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8162@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8163
8164Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8165
8166@example
8167gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8168@end example
69da35b5
NC
8169
8170This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8171perfectly legal
8172
8173@example
8174bin/
8175 cygxxx-5.dll
8176lib/
c0065db7 8177 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8178@end example
8179
dc8465bf 8180Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8181even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8182@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8183
8184Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8185wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8186
81871. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8188work with auto-imported data.
8189
dc8465bf
NC
81902. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8191import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8192symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8193for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8194possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8195
45e948fe
NC
81963. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8197critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8198in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8199stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8200
69da35b5 8201So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8202true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8203a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8204binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8205massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8206requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8207will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8208
c0065db7 8209@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8210@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8211@item adding additional names
8212Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8213A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8214exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8215when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8216import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8217
c0065db7 8218@example
dc8465bf
NC
8219LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8220
8221EXPORTS
c0065db7 8222foo
dc8465bf 8223_foo = foo
c0065db7 8224@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8225
8226The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8227
8228Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8229source code using the "weak" attribute:
8230
c0065db7
RM
8231@example
8232void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8233void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8234@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8235
8236See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8237symbols.
8238
8239@item renaming symbols
8240Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8241kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8242@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8243DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8244created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8245
c0065db7 8246@example
dc8465bf
NC
8247LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8248
8249EXPORTS
8250_foo = foo
c0065db7 8251@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8252
8253The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8254@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8255@end table
dc8465bf 8256
0a5d968e 8257Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8258unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8259If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8260@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8261that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8262@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8263renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8264to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8265the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8266In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8267which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8268
8269@cindex weak externals
8270@item weak externals
8271The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8272weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8273defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8274are three variants of weak externals:
8275@itemize
8276@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8277called lazy externals.
8278@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8279This form is not presently implemented.
8280@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8281implemented.
8282@end itemize
8283As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8284are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8285uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8286
8287@cindex aligned common symbols
8288@item aligned common symbols
8289As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8290desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8291the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8292carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8293by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8294tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8295but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8296warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8297
2ca22b03
NC
8298@end table
8299
8300@ifclear GENERIC
8301@lowersections
8302@end ifclear
8303@end ifset
8304
e0001a05
NC
8305@ifset XTENSA
8306@ifclear GENERIC
8307@raisesections
8308@end ifclear
8309
8310@node Xtensa
8311@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8312
8313@cindex Xtensa processors
8314The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8315@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8316specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8317keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8318example, with the command:
8319
8320@smallexample
8321SECTIONS
8322@{
8323 .text : @{
8324 *(.literal .text)
8325 @}
8326@}
8327@end smallexample
8328
8329@noindent
8330@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8331and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8332literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8333interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8334group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8335files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8336and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8337
43cd72b9 8338@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8339@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8340Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8341provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8342is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8343literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8344will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8345location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8346the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8347unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8348@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8349range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8350
8351For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8352to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8353instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8354instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8355instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8356@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8357hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8358By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8359switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8360density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8361instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8362performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8363linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8364a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8365
8366The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8367control the linker:
8368
8369@cindex Xtensa options
8370@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8371@item --size-opt
8372When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8373more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8374no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8375alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8376preserve the correctness of the code.
8377@end table
e0001a05
NC
8378
8379@ifclear GENERIC
8380@lowersections
8381@end ifclear
8382@end ifset
8383
252b5132
RH
8384@ifclear SingleFormat
8385@node BFD
8386@chapter BFD
8387
8388@cindex back end
8389@cindex object file management
8390@cindex object formats available
8391@kindex objdump -i
8392The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8393These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8394object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8395format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8396it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8397associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8398object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8399(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8400list all the formats available for your configuration.
8401
8402@cindex BFD requirements
8403@cindex requirements for BFD
8404As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8405several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8406BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8407formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8408been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8409BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8410may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8411
8412One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8413mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8414useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8415conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8416
8417@menu
8418* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8419@end menu
8420
8421@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8422@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8423@cindex opening object files
8424@include bfdsumm.texi
8425@end ifclear
8426
8427@node Reporting Bugs
8428@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8429@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8430@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8431
ff5dcc92 8432Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8433
8434Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8435it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8436to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8437work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8438@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8439
8440In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8441information that enables us to fix the bug.
8442
8443@menu
8444* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8445* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8446@end menu
8447
8448@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8449@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8450@cindex bug criteria
8451
8452If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8453
8454@itemize @bullet
8455@cindex fatal signal
8456@cindex linker crash
8457@cindex crash of linker
8458@item
8459If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8460@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8461
8462@cindex error on valid input
8463@item
ff5dcc92 8464If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8465
8466@cindex invalid input
8467@item
ff5dcc92 8468If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8469may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8470object files are correct.
8471
8472@item
8473If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8474improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8475@end itemize
8476
8477@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8478@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8479@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8480@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8481
8482A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8483products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8484recommend you contact that organization first.
8485
8486You can find contact information for many support companies and
8487individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8488distribution.
8489
ad22bfe8 8490@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8491Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8492@value{BUGURL}.
8493@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8494
8495The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8496@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8497fact or leave it out, state it!
8498
8499Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8500problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8501assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8502matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8503the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8504location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8505were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8506into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8507specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8508and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8509
8510Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8511the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8512on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8513
8514Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8515bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8516respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8517You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8518
8519To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8520
8521@itemize @bullet
8522@item
ff5dcc92 8523The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8524the @samp{--version} argument.
8525
8526Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8527the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8528
8529@item
ff5dcc92 8530Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8531patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8532
8533@item
8534The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8535version number.
8536
8537@item
ff5dcc92 8538What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8539``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8540
8541@item
8542The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8543observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8544list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8545sufficient.
8546
8547If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8548and then we might not encounter the bug.
8549
8550@item
8551A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8552bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8553provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8554bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8555state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8556requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8557we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8558attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8559
8560If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8561@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8562object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8563@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8564how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8565
8566@item
8567A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8568incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8569
ff5dcc92 8570Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8571will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8572not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8573a chance to make a mistake.
8574
8575Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8576say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8577copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8578C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8579and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8580fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8581you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8582any conclusion from our observations.
8583
8584@item
ff5dcc92 8585If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8586diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8587@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8588If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8589context, not by line number.
8590
8591The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8592sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8593@end itemize
8594
8595Here are some things that are not necessary:
8596
8597@itemize @bullet
8598@item
8599A description of the envelope of the bug.
8600
8601Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8602which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8603changes will not affect it.
8604
8605This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8606will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8607with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8608We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8609
8610Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8611of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8612output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8613less time, and so on.
8614
8615However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8616report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8617
8618@item
8619A patch for the bug.
8620
8621A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8622the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8623a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8624to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8625
ff5dcc92 8626Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8627construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8628through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8629able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8630fixed.
8631
8632And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8633patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8634help us to understand.
8635
8636@item
8637A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8638
8639Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8640things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8641@end itemize
8642
8643@node MRI
8644@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8645@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8646To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8647linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8648alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8649described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8650simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8651@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8652linker commands; these commands are described here.
8653
8654In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8655file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8656features to make use of them.
8657
8658You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8659@samp{-c} command-line option.
8660
8661Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8662command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8663blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8664MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8665issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8666
8667Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8668
8669You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8670lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8671The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8672
8673@table @code
8674@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8675@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8676@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8677Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8678the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8679@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8680your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8681script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8682commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8683input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8684@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8685
8686@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8687@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8688Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8689in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8690
8691@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8692
8693@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8694@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8695Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8696@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8697
8698@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8699@item BASE @var{expression}
8700Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8701absolute addresses) in the output file.
8702
8703@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8704@item CHIP @var{expression}
8705@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8706This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8707
8708@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8709@item END
8710This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8711
8712@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8713@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8714Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8715language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8716
8717@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8718@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8719Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8720@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8721
8722The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8723same line, with no change in its effect.
8724
8725@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8726@item LOAD @var{filename}
8727@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8728Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8729same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8730command line.
8731
8732@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8733@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8734@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8735MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8736option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8737
8738@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8739@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8740@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8741Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8742order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8743script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8744sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8745file, in the order specified.
8746
8747@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8748@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8749@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8750@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8751Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8752@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8753
8754@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8755@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8756@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8757@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8758You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8759specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8760If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8761@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8762@end table
8763
793c5807
NC
8764@node GNU Free Documentation License
8765@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8766@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8767
370b66a1
CD
8768@node LD Index
8769@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8770
8771@printindex cp
8772
8773@tex
7ca01ed9 8774% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8775% meantime:
8776\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8777\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8778\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8779\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8780\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8781\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8782\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8783\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8784\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8785% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8786@end tex
8787
252b5132 8788@bye